JP7229872B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player.

As a conventional game machine, a gate as a predetermined area through which game balls can pass and an ordinary variable device that may be opened by passing through the gate are directly connected by a flow-down passage for game balls. There was (for example, see patent document 1). In such a case, in the time-saving state as a special state, the percentage of game balls passing through the predetermined area entering the normal variable device was high.

JP 2014-4181 A

However, in the gaming machine of Patent Literature 1, there is a risk of losing interest when the game ball does not enter the normal variable device even though it has passed through the gate as the predetermined area in the time-saving state.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made by paying attention to such problems, and provides a game machine capable of suppressing a decline in interest even when a game ball does not enter an ordinary variable device in a special state. With the goal.

(A) A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a specific display means capable of displaying a specific display related to the variable display on the display means;
a change effect executing means capable of executing a change effect that changes the display color of the specific display;
The change effect includes a first pattern that changes the display color of the specific display and a second pattern that does not change the display color of the specific display,
The display color of the specific display varies depending on the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state,
There are a normal performance state and a specific performance state, which is a performance state that can be shifted from the normal performance state, in which the rate of control to the advantageous state is higher than that of the normal performance state,
The specific rendering state is a rendering state in which the number of colors of the specific display and the background image displayed on the display means is smaller than that of the normal rendering state,
When the change effect execution means executes the change effect in the normal effect state, the display color of the specific display is changed to a display color corresponding to the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state, When the changing performance is executed by the changing performance executing means in the specific performance state, the display color of the specific display is not changed and is made a common display color regardless of the degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state. ,
displaying the display color of the specific display in a display color corresponding to the degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state when the specific display state is shifted to the normal display state;
When the transition from the normal rendering state to the specific rendering state is determined for the variable display that has not yet started, and the variable rendering that can be executed before the variable display to be determined is executed, The transition from the normal production state to the specific production state is restricted,
A gaming machine characterized by:
(1) A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
A game area where game media can flow down (for example, a game area formed on the game board 2);
a discharge area (e.g., out port 51) capable of discharging a game medium (e.g., game ball) to the outside of the game area;
State control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling the game state;
and a value giving means (for example, payout control board) for giving value,
The state control means can be controlled to any game state including at least a normal state (eg, normal state), a special state (eg, high base state), and the advantageous state (eg, jackpot game state). can be,
The game area includes a first area (e.g., left side area) and a second area (e.g., right side area) different from the first area,
In the second area,
Based on the variable display result of the normal identification information (for example, normal pattern), a first state (for example, open state) in which the game medium can easily enter and a second state (for example, closed state) in which the game medium is difficult or impossible to enter state) and a normal variable device (for example, variable winning ball device 6B),
A specific area (for example, the normal figure operation opening 50) that can execute the variable display of the normal identification information by entering the game medium is provided,
Based on being controlled to the special state by the state control means, the normal variable device is more easily controlled to the first state than the normal state (for example, in the high base state, the variable winning ball device 6B easier to control in the open state than in the normal state),
The value giving means gives a value equal to or less than a predetermined value required for the game medium to enter the specific area based on the entry of the game medium into the specific area (e.g. There is one payout if a ball enters),
The specific area is provided at a downstream position from the normal variable device (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-1, the normal pattern operation port 50 is provided at a downstream position from the variable winning ball device 6B) ,
A gaming medium that has flowed down the second region in the special state has a higher rate of entering the specific region than being discharged in the discharge region (for example, a game ball that has flowed down the right side region in the high base state , the ratio of entering the normal figure operation port 50 is higher than being discharged at the out port 51),
The discharge area is provided at the bottom of the second area (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-1, the out port 51 is provided at the bottom of the right area),
moreover,
Specific display means (for example, effect control CPU 120 that performs pending display and active display) that can display specific display related to variable display on the display means;
A change effect execution means capable of executing a change effect that changes the display color of the specific display (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of 074AKS035),
The display color of the specific display differs depending on the degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state (for example, when the active display (including the case where it changes at the stage of pending display) changes to the "red" stage , the variable display result will always be a "jackpot", etc.),
There are a normal effect state and a specific effect state, which is a state of effect that can be shifted from the normal effect state, and in which the ratio of control to the advantageous state is higher than that of the normal effect state (for example, a monochrome effect is executed. In this case, the expectation that the variable display result will be a big hit is higher than when the monochrome effect is not executed, etc.)
The specific rendering state is a rendering state in which the number of colors of at least a part of the display target including at least the specific display displayed on the display means is smaller than that of the normal rendering state (for example, rendering By performing monochrome output processing on the control board 12 side, it is an effect that changes the target image displayed on the image display device 3 to a monochrome mode, and is used when displaying a pre-stored effect image. For example, the number of colors to be displayed is displayed with fewer colors than the normal production state),
When the change effect execution means executes the change effect in the normal effect state, while changing the display color of the specific display to a display color according to the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state, When the change performance is executed by the change performance means in the specific performance state, a common display color is used without changing the display color of the specific display regardless of the degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state. (For example, during the specific effect state (when the monochrome effect flag is on), since the monochrome output process is being performed, even if the change effect of the success mode is executed, regardless of the degree of expectation of the big hit, hold The display and active display are displayed in "white".On the other hand, in the normal effect state when the monochrome effect is not being executed, it is displayed in the display color according to the degree of expectation according to the display mode change pattern, etc.),
When the specific effect state is shifted to the normal effect state, the display color of the specific display is displayed in a display color according to the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state (for example, in step 074AKS032, the display color is displayed in a monochrome mode. The number of colors used for the target image that was the display target returns to the normal number of colors, and the suspended display and active display whose display mode has changed due to the change effect are displayed in the changed display color, etc.)
It is characterized by

According to such a configuration, even if the game medium does not enter the normal variable device in the special state, it is possible to reduce the decrease in interest. Furthermore, the degree of expectation can be appropriately notified by color, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

(2) The gaming machine of (1) above,
The discharge area is provided at the bottom of the second area (eg, the out port 51 is provided at the bottom of the right area, as shown in FIG. 9-1).

According to such a configuration, even if the game medium does not enter the normal variable device in the special state, the rate of entering the specific area can be made higher than the rate of entering the ejection area. decline can be reduced.

(3) The gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
The value giving means gives the same number of game media as the number of game media entered when the game media enter the specific area (for example, when the game ball enters the normal figure operation port 50, There is one payout equal to the number).

According to such a configuration, even if game media do not enter the normal variable device in the special state, the same number of game media as the number of entered game media are given, so that the decline in interest can be reduced. .

(4) The game machine of (1) to (3) above,
Based on the variable display result of the special identification information becoming a specific result (for example, big hit display result), a first state (for example, open state) in which the game medium can easily enter and a state in which it is difficult or impossible for the game medium to enter A special variable device (eg, special variable winning ball device 7) that can be changed to a second state (eg, closed state) is further provided,
The specific area is provided at a downstream position from the special variable device (for example, as shown in FIG. ing).

According to such a configuration, even if the game medium does not enter the normal variable device in the special state, it is possible to reduce the decrease in interest. In addition, since the rate of entering the specific area is higher than that of being discharged in the discharge area, even if the game medium does not enter the special variable device, the loss of the ball is reduced when it does not enter the special variable device. be able to.

(5) The game machine of (1) to (4) above,
The variable display of the normal identification information can also be executed by entering a game medium in a predetermined area (for example, the passage gate 41) different from the specific area (for example, the passage gate 41 different from the normal pattern operation opening 50). Variable display of normal symbols is also executed by the entry of game balls in ).

According to such a configuration, even if the game medium does not enter the normal variable device in the special state, it is possible to reduce the decrease in interest.

(6) The gaming machine of (5) above,
The predetermined area is provided on the upstream side of the normal variable device (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-1, the passage gate 41 is provided on the upstream side of the variable winning ball device 6B),
A gaming medium that has entered the predetermined area can continue to enter the normal variable device (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-1, a game ball that has entered the passage gate 41 can continue to enter the variable winning sphere device 6B).

According to such a configuration, since the game medium that has entered the predetermined area continues to enter the normal variable device, waste of the game medium can be prevented.

(7) The game machine of (1) to (6) above,
When game media enter the normal variable device, the value giving means gives the same number of game media as the number of entered game media (for example, when game balls enter the variable winning ball device 6B, the number of entered game media There is one payout equal to the number you did).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game media from increasing excessively during the special state.

(8) The game machine of (1) to (7) above,
The gaming medium that has flowed down to the second area in the special state has a higher rate of entering the specific area than the rate of entering the normal variable device (for example, a game ball that has flowed down to the right side area in the high base state , the ratio of entering the normal figure operation port 50 is higher than the ratio of entering the variable winning ball device 6B).

According to such a configuration, even if the game ball does not enter the normal variable device while preventing the rate of entering the normal variable device from being too high during the special state, c) the game By entering the medium, it is possible to reduce the situation disadvantageous to the player.

Further, the modes for carrying out the invention described later include inventions according to the following means (9) to (15). Conventionally, in a game machine, when the variable display of display symbols in a variable display game is completely stopped, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-2224, when the stop symbol mode becomes a specific display mode , it becomes an advantageous state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous for the player. For example, a gaming machine in a jackpot game state opens a special electric accessory called a jackpot or an attacker, and continuously provides a state in which it is extremely easy for a player to win a game ball for a certain period of time. do. In such a gaming machine, various types of effects are executed to notify the player of the degree of expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state before the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed.

As such a game machine, for example, there is a game machine that reduces the number of colors used and executes production in black and white mode.

However, since the number of colors is merely reduced, there is still room for improvement in terms of enhancing the amusement of the game. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game.

(9) As a gaming machine according to another aspect for achieving the above object, a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player,
Specific display means (for example, effect control CPU 120 that performs pending display and active display) that can display specific display related to variable display on the display means;
A change effect execution means capable of executing a change effect that changes the display color of the specific display (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of 074AKS035),
The display color of the specific display differs depending on the degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state (for example, when the active display (including the case where it changes at the stage of pending display) changes to the "red" stage , the variable display result will always be a "jackpot", etc.),
There are a normal effect state and a specific effect state, which is a state of effect that can be shifted from the normal effect state, and in which the ratio of control to the advantageous state is higher than that of the normal effect state (for example, a monochrome effect is executed. In this case, the expectation that the variable display result will be a big hit is higher than when the monochrome effect is not executed, etc.)
The specific rendering state is a rendering state in which the number of colors of at least a part of the display target including at least the specific display displayed on the display means is smaller than that of the normal rendering state (for example, rendering By performing monochrome output processing on the control board 12 side, it is an effect that changes the target image displayed on the image display device 3 to a monochrome mode, and is used when displaying a pre-stored effect image. For example, the number of colors to be displayed is displayed with fewer colors than the normal production state),
When the change effect execution means executes the change effect in the normal effect state, while changing the display color of the specific display to a display color according to the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state, When the change performance is executed by the change performance means in the specific performance state, a common display color is used without changing the display color of the specific display regardless of the degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state. (For example, during the specific effect state (when the monochrome effect flag is on), since the monochrome output process is being performed, even if the change effect of the success mode is executed, regardless of the degree of expectation of the big hit, hold The display and active display are displayed in "white".On the other hand, in the normal effect state where the monochrome effect is not being executed, the display color is displayed according to the degree of expectation according to the display mode change pattern, etc.),
When shifting from the specific effect state to the normal effect state, the display color of the specific display is displayed in a display color according to the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state (for example, in step 074AKS032, the display color is displayed in a monochrome mode. The number of colors used for the target image that was the display target returns to the normal number of colors, and the suspended display and active display whose display mode has changed due to the change effect are displayed in the changed display color, etc.)
It is characterized by

According to such a configuration, the degree of expectation can be appropriately notified by color, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

(10) In the gaming machine described in (9) above,
The common display color is a display color that is displayed at a high rate before the change effect is executed in the normal effect state and the specific effect state (for example, it is displayed as "white"),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, the degree of expectation can be appropriately notified by color, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

(11) In the gaming machine described in (9) or (10) above,
Furthermore, a light emitting means (for example, a game effect lamp 9, etc.) that can emit light according to the effect being executed is provided,
The light emitting means emits light in the number of colors corresponding to the number of colors to be displayed on the display means in the specific effect state (for example, in step 074AKS056, the number of colors corresponding to the number of colors of the monochrome image is displayed). number of colors, etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to emphasize that the game is in the specific effect state, thereby improving the game interest.

(12) In the gaming machine according to any one of (9) to (11) above,
In the specific effect state, the number of colors of the specific display and the background image displayed by the display means is reduced more than in the normal effect state (for example, in the processing of step 074AKS056, the monochrome effect is executed. By starting (monochrome output processing), a monochrome target image such as a suspended display, an active display, a background image, etc. is displayed in a monochrome mode, etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to emphasize that the game is in the specific effect state, thereby improving the game interest.

(13) In the gaming machine according to any one of (9) to (12) above,
In the specific performance state, the performance sound output in the normal performance state can be controlled silently, and when the change performance is executed in the specific performance state, the change performance is started. (For example, during a specific production state, the output sound is muted, and for the change production, only the execution start sound is output and the success sound or failure sound is not output, etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to highlight the specific effect state and to recognize the start of execution of the change effect.

(14) In the gaming machine according to any one of (9) to (13) above,
When the changing effect is executed in the specific effect state, and the display color of the specific display is changed when the specific effect state is changed to the normal effect state, the specific display is performed at the transition timing. Output a change notification sound that notifies that the display color of has changed (for example, for success sound or failure sound, output at the timing when the monochrome effect ends),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier to recognize that the specific display has changed, and to improve the amusement of the game.

(15) In the gaming machine according to any one of (9) to (14) above,
The number of colors of the special information that does not suggest the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state is not reduced even in the specific effect state (for example, the main board 11 For images for displaying information according to commands, etc. sent from the
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize the content suggested by the special information even in the specific effect state, and prevent the decline in the interest in the game.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating an effect control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of various jackpots. (A) is an explanatory view showing a big hit variation pattern determination table (for big win A), (B) is an explanatory view showing a big win variation pattern determination table (for big win B and big win C), and (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit variation pattern determination table. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a deviation pattern determination table; It is explanatory drawing which shows a receiving command buffer at the time of dynamic winning. (A) is a front view of a display monitor, (B) is a diagram showing a display mode of the display monitor, and (C) is an explanatory diagram of display contents. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area, and (B) is a diagram showing a configuration of a reception command buffer at the time of start winning. It is a flow chart which shows game control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows start winning a prize judging processing. It is a flow chart showing a winning random number value determination process. It is a flow chart which shows a part of production|presentation control process processing. It is a flow chart which shows pre-reading notice setting processing. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a determination ratio of a display pattern of a pre-reading advance notice effect; 9 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing suggestive effect determination processing during rear variable display; FIG. (A) is a diagram showing a determination ratio of effects to be executed as suggestive effects during the rear variable display, and (B) is a diagram showing the effect patterns of the big hit suggestive effects and setting suggestive effects to be executed as the suggestive effects during the rear variable display. be. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the production|presentation pattern of a big hit suggestion production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the production|presentation pattern of setting suggestion production|presentation. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing suggestive effect determination processing during front variable display; FIG. (A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the performance to be executed as the front variable display suggesting performance when execution of the big hit suggesting performance is determined, and (B) is a diagram showing the execution of the set suggesting performance is determined. (C) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of effects to be executed as suggestive effects during variable front display in the case, and (C) is a diagram showing effect patterns of character effects and timer effects executed as suggestive effects during variable front display, (D) is a diagram showing the degree of expectation for a big hit of the character effect and the timer effect and the degree of execution expectation of the setting suggestion effect. (A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the effect pattern of the character effect, (B) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the effect pattern of the timer effect, and (C) shows the content of each effect pattern of the timer effect. It is a diagram. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation execution period in variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the variable display of super reach. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing execution determination ratios and execution expectations of setting suggestion effects as suggestive effects during front variable display of character effects and timer effects in a modification; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a display mode of a pending memory display and effect images in a modified example; It is a figure which shows the execution period of the setting suggestion production|presentation by the variable display of normal reach in a modification, non-shortening non-reach, and shortening non-reach. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in the characteristic portion 131F. It is a figure which shows the normal figure process processing in the characteristic part 131F. It is a flow chart showing a normal symbol start winning process in the characteristic portion 131F. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing in game control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of start winning a prize judging processing. 10 is a flow chart showing an example of winning random number determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a variation pattern; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a variation pattern determination table according to variable display results; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of command analysis processing; It is a figure which shows the structural example of the command buffer at the time of starting winning a prize. It is explanatory drawing explaining an example with the production|presentation control command received by the production|presentation control board side, and the process content performed by command analysis process according to the received production|presentation control command. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of pre-reading notice setting processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a configuration example of an active display mode determination table; It is a figure which shows the structural example of the display mode change pattern determination table at the time of the number of reservations 4. FIG. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the display mode change pattern determination table at the time of the number of reservations 4. FIG. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the display mode change pattern determination table at the time of the number of reservations 3. FIG. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the display mode change pattern determination table at the time of the number of reservations 3. FIG. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the display mode change pattern determination table at the time of the number of reservations 2. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of monochrome effect setting processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of determining whether or not to execute a monochrome effect; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of determining the end timing of monochrome effect; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing; It is a flow chart which shows an example of change production setting processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of effect processing during variable display; It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation operation|movement at the time of monochrome production|presentation and change production|presentation being performed. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation operation|movement at the time of monochrome production|presentation and change production|presentation being performed. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of pre-reading notice setting processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of setting processing such as monochrome effect; 8A and 8B are diagrams showing an example of a display mode change pattern determination table and an active display change timing determination table; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows an example of change production setting processing. It is a figure which shows an example of a change pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation operation|movement at the time of monochrome production|presentation and change production|presentation being performed. It is a flow chart which shows a part of production|presentation control process processing. It is a flow chart which shows pre-reading notice setting processing. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a determination ratio of a display pattern of a pre-reading advance notice effect; 9 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing suggestive effect determination processing during rear variable display; FIG. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the production|presentation performed as suggestion production|presentation during rear variable display, and an effect|presentation pattern. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the production|presentation pattern of a big hit suggestion production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the production|presentation pattern of setting suggestion production|presentation. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing suggestive effect determination processing during front variable display; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a determination ratio, an effect pattern, and an execution expectation level of an effect to be executed as a suggestive effect during front variable display; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the effect pattern of the character effect, the determination ratio of the effect pattern of the timer effect, and the content of each effect pattern of the timer effect. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation execution period in variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the variable display of super reach. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing execution determination ratios and execution expectations of setting suggestion effects as suggestive effects during front variable display of character effects and timer effects in a modification; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a display mode of a pending memory display and effect images in a modified example; It is a figure which shows the execution period of the setting suggestion production|presentation by the variable display of normal reach in a modification, non-shortening non-reach, and shortening non-reach.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area), a variable display (also called a special game) of special symbols (also called special symbols) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special pattern may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are variably displayed (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, up and down direction scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronism is generically called simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count is also referred to as the total reserved memory count.

In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first suspension display 25A and a second suspension display 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. , the number of first reserved memories is displayed, and the second reserved display 25B displays the number of second reserved memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning hole is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize winning port door is in the ON state, the special prize winning port door opens the big prize winning port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big prize winning port. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize to a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Above the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area from the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a batted ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Overview of Game Progress)

A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotating operation of a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern lost pattern) other than the normal pattern winning pattern is stop-displayed as the fixed normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern lost". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the type of the big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big win" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "lost".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "minor win", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, a plurality of types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc. described later) are prepared, and the jackpot is obtained according to these. type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power-on) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs). If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by turning on/off, operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols not yet stopped and displayed are variably displayed. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of a ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special game is a "small hit", the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 is a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined small winning combination (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special game is "lost", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" (Also referred to as non-reach lost") may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach lost"). In addition, when the display result is "lost", after the mode of variable display of decorative patterns becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of variable display of decorative patterns is a predetermined ready-to-win combination that is not a big hit combination ("no reach"). ”) is stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes “reach lost”).

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to the variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. It should be noted that during the small winning game state, some of the jackpot types (jackpot types in the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in the subsequent game state high probability state) jackpot game By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 .

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches (gate switch 21, starting switch (first starting switch 22A and second starting switch 22B), count switch 23) for detecting game balls A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted, for example, on the power board. When the clear switch is turned on and the power is turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization processing, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Moreover, CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates initialization to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not ON (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stoppage of the power supply. In this process when the power supply is stopped, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for progressing the game, but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the backed up data (using an error detection code) to determine whether the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs recovery processing (step S6) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be

And CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates restoration from a power failure to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power outage that is backed up, and if the special game is being executed, the effect control that specifies the display result of the special game that is being executed You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process described later. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the restoration time from the power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the power failure has been restored or is being restored from the power failure. Display the screen for The effect control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

After completing the recovery process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the timer interrupt process for game control shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby, through the switch circuit 110, the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). CPU103 by executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the big hit game state and small hit game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized (details later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). By the CPU 103 executing normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, the occurrence of starting winning is detected, and the process of storing the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of prefetching and judging a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the generation of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination to the effect control board 12 is performed. . The effect control command at the time of starting winning thus set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the condition for starting the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "off", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small win" or "losing", when the time saving state or probability variable state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions, and processing for judging whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this process during opening of the small prize, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6 is executed. When the production control main processing shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed without receiving a command designating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game was "lost". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during the small hit of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "4". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . Further, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. Also, in the big-hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the ending production process. 7", and the effect processing during the big hit is ended.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, effect control patterns corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the relevant pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to a computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, the ratio of one is "0%" and the other is "100%" or less than "100%".

(Description of Characteristic Portion 153SG)
Next, the game machine in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-1 to 8-31.

First, FIG. 8-1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1 in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. As shown in FIGS. 8-1 and 8-3, the pachinko game machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 153SG001a formed in a vertically elongated rectangular frame shape, and a game board (gauge It is composed of a board) 2 and a game machine frame (frame) 153SG003 for supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area. In addition, in the game machine frame 153SG003, a glass door frame 153SG003a having a glass window is positioned around the left side between a door open position where the front surface of the game machine frame 153SG003 is opened and a door closed position where the front surface is closed. The game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 153SG003a, and the game area can be seen through the glass window when the glass door frame 153SG003a is closed.

In addition, the game machine frame 153SG003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a store clerk or the like into a lock (not shown) to unlock it. The door frame 153SG003a cannot be opened.

The left game area 153SG002L is a game area in which a game ball that is relatively weakly struck (left-handed) by operating the batted ball operation handle 30 flows down, and the right game area 153SG002R is the left game area 153SG002L by the operation of the batted ball operation handle 30. This is the game area in which a game ball that is hit harder (right-handed) than the game ball flowing down passes through the upper path 153SG002C of the image display device 5 and flows down.

In addition, the left game area 153SG002L is provided with a general winning hole 10, and the right game area 153SG002R includes a passage gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B, and a general game area 153SG002R from upstream to downstream of the right game area 153SG002R. A winning hole 10 and a special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged. In other words, the game ball flowing down the left game area 153SG002L can win the first start winning opening formed by the general winning opening 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 153SG002R can be variable. It is possible to win the second start winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6B, the general winning hole 10 and the large winning hole formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and to pass through the passage gate 41. - 特許庁

As shown in FIG. 8-1, between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7, a plurality of obstacle nails 153SGK1 are arranged. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left game area 153SG002L cannot win the second starting winning opening or the big winning opening, and the game ball flowing down the right gaming area 153SG002R cannot win the first starting winning opening. It's becoming

In addition, a first reserved memory display area 153SG005D and a second reserved memory display area 153SG005U are set on the left and right of the lower portion of the display area of the image display device 5 . In the first reserved memory display area 153SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 153SG005U, a reserved memory display for identifiably displaying the reserved memory number (special figure reserved memory number) of the variable display corresponding to the special figure game is performed.

As shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, the main substrate 11 in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment is accommodated in a substrate case 153SG201 configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. It is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 in this state. In addition, the main board 11 has a lock switch 153SG051 for switching to a setting value change state in which the setting values of the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate), etc., which will be described later in the setting value change state. A setting changeover switch 153SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing setting values, and an open sensor 153SG090 that detects opening of the gaming machine frame 153SG003 are provided. Although the details will be described later, the setting value change state in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment is a state in which the game hall clerk or the like can check the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (setting value confirmation state). ) is also

A setting-switching main body portion provided with operation portions that can be operated by the player, such as the lock switch 153SG051 and the setting-switching switch 153SG052, is accommodated in the substrate case 153SG201 together with the main substrate 11, and the lock switch 153SG051 and the setting-switching switch 153SG052 are housed in the substrate case 153SG201. are exposed to the rear side through an opening formed in the rear surface of the substrate case 153SG201 so that it can be operated without opening the substrate case 153SG201.

Since the substrate case 153SG201 having the lock switch 153SG051 and the setting changeover switch 153SG052 is provided on the back of the pachinko game machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate when the game machine frame 153SG003 is closed. Operation is possible by opening the gaming machine frame 153SG003 using the key. Further, since the lock switch 153SG051 requires operation of a setting key owned by a game arcade clerk or the like, it can be operated only by the clerk who possesses the setting key. In addition, the lock switch 153SG051 is also a switch that can execute switching operation between ON and OFF, which will be described later, with a setting key. In the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but one key may be used for both.

A display monitor 153SG029 capable of displaying set values and base values, which will be described later, is arranged on the board case 153SG201. The display monitor 153SG029 is connected to the main substrate 11 and arranged above the substrate case 153SG201. That is, the display monitor 153SG029 is arranged in front of the main board 11 in the board case 153SG201 when visually recognizing it. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the game machine frame 153SG003 is not opened, the front when the main board 11 is visually recognized means the back side of the game board 2 when the game machine frame 153SG003 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁However, the front when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko game machine 1 may be common.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-1 and 8-2, at a predetermined position (for example, the lower left position of the game area) of the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1 in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, a second 1st special symbol display device 153SG004A capable of executing variable display of 1 special symbol, 2nd special symbol display device 153SG004B capable of executing variable display of 2nd special symbol, 1st pending display capable of displaying the number of first pending memories device 153SG025A, second reservation display 153SG025B capable of displaying the second reservation memory number, normal design display 153SG020 capable of executing variable display of normal design, normal design reservation display 153SG025C capable of displaying the number of normal design reservation storage, A round display 153SG131 capable of displaying the number of rounds (jackpot type) of the jackpot game during the jackpot game, and in a game state in which game balls such as a high base state (time saving state) or jackpot game state are launched toward the right game area 153SG002R. A game information display unit 153SG200 is provided in which a right hitting lamp 153SG132 that lights up, a variable probability lamp 153SG133 that lights in the variable probability state, and a short time lamp 153SG134 that lights in the high base state (short time state) are collectively arranged.

Each of the first special symbol display device 153SG004A and the second special symbol display device 153SG004B is composed of an 8-segment LED. In addition, in the first special symbol display device 153SG004A and the second special symbol display device 153SG004B, when the variable display result of the special symbol is a loss or a small hit, the variable display result can be derived and displayed by a common combination. ing.

In the variable display of the first special symbol, when the variable display result becomes a big hit, the first special symbol display device 153SG004A uses two types of big win symbols (combination of LEDs that light up) for each big win type as the variable display result. Derivation display is possible. In addition, when the variable display result of the variable display of the second special symbol becomes a big hit, the second special symbol display device 153SG004B variably displays two kinds of big win symbols (a combination of lit LEDs) for each big win type. Results and derivations can be displayed.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed are all different between the first special symbol display device 153SG004A and the second special symbol display device 153SG004B, but the first special symbol display device 153SG004A At least a part of the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed in the second special symbol display device 153SG004B may overlap.

The first suspension display 153SG025A and the second suspension display 153SG025B each have four segments of LEDs arranged in parallel in the horizontal direction. With these first pending display 153SG025A and second pending display 153SG025B, if the number of pending memories is 1, only the LED at the left end lights up. The third LED from the left and the fourth LED from the left light up in sequence. Each time the variable display is executed, the reserve memory is reduced (consumed), so that the LED in the reserve display device corresponding to the variable display is shifted in a predetermined shift direction (feature of the present embodiment). In the part 153SG, the lights are extinguished toward the left direction).

In addition, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, when both the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory exist, the variable display based on the second special figure pending memory is preferentially executed. It looks like For this reason, for example, when there is one first special figure pending memory and two second special figure pending memories exist (only the LED at the left end of the first pending indicator 153SG025A is lit, and the second pending If the two LEDs on the left of the display 153SG25B are lit), after the second special figure pending memory becomes 0 by executing the variable display based on the second special figure pending memory, the first special figure pending A memory-based variable display is performed.

Also, the round indicator 153SG131 is composed of five segments (LEDs). Incidentally, as the jackpot types in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, a total of three jackpot types are provided: a jackpot A that is a 5-round jackpot, a jackpot B that is a 10-round jackpot, and a jackpot C that is a 15-round jackpot. Which of the segments constituting the round indicator 153SG131 lights up differs depending on the types of these jackpots.

A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15 . The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, a effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control the image display operation of the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. and LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of decorative LEDs.

FIG. 8-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in the characteristic portion 153SG in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (class of command) and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command form shown in FIG. 8-4(A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), the command 8001H is the first variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 153SG004A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 153SG004B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. It is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time) such as a pattern. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command that designates a variable display result such as a special design or a decorative design. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-4(B), the determination result (predetermined result ), and different EXT data are set according to the determination result (jackpot type determination result) as to which of a plurality of types the jackpot type should be when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-4(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result specifying command indicating a predetermined result that the variable display result is "no". The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result specification command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command for notifying a pre-determined result that the variable display result will be a "minor win".

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command for designating the stoppage (confirmation) of the decorative design in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 . The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time saving control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state in which the time saving control is performed (high base state , time-saving state) is the second game state designation command.

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormality) designation command that designates the type of error (abnormality) that has occurred and the type of error (abnormality) that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . In the error (abnormality) designation command, for example, by setting EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is specified which error (abnormality) occurrence has been determined on the effect control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) is notified by error notification processing, which will be described later.

The command A0XXH is a win start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is in the open state in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for a large winning opening that notifies that the large winning opening changes from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A3XXH is a winning end designation command for designating the display of the performance image at the end of the big winning game state or the small winning game state.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed in the big winning game state or the small winning game state (for example, "1" to "15"). be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that a game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting winning (first starting winning) occurs. It is a first start winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 153SG004A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. , It is a second start winning designation command that notifies that the second start condition for executing the special game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 153SG004B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number in order to display the number of special figure reserved storage so that it can be specified on the image display device 5 or the like. Command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure pending storage number, in order to display the number of special figure pending storage so as to be identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied, when the second starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories decreases), the special game It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning determination result specification commands) indicating the content of the winning determination result. Among them, the command C4XXH is a symbol specifying command indicating whether or not the variable display result will be a "big win" and the judgment result of the big win type (probability variation, non-probability variation, etc.) as a result of determination at the time of winning. In addition, the command C6XXH is a variation category indicating whether the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination is a variation pattern of "non-reach", "super reach", and "other" as a result of determination at the time of winning. is a command.

The command D0XXH is a set value designation command for designating a newly set set value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (the effect control CPU 120). The command E101H is a hot start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started without clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (that power has been restored, also called hot start). The command E102H is a cold start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started after clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (cold start).

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, etc., and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a game control program and performs control operations, and a numerical data that indicates a random value is updated independently of the CPU 103. A random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, thereby executing processing for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. At this time, the CPU 103 reads out fixed data from the ROM 101, and the CPU 103 writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them in the variable data write operation. Variation data reading operation to read, CPU103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via I / O105, CPU103 to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via I / O105 and a transmission operation for outputting various signals.

FIG. 8-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 8-5, in the characteristic portion 153SG of this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for the big hit type determination, the variation pattern Numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for judgment, the random number MR4 for judging the results of the normal map display, and the random number MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled so as to be countable. It should be noted that random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. FIG. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100 . Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

In this embodiment, the random numbers MR1 to MR5 are used as values within the range shown in FIG. 8-5. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be varied according to the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

FIG. 8-6 shows variation patterns in this embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "missing", the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for cases such as when the display result is a "big hit". In addition, one variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variable display result is a "minor hit". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as a "reach loss variation pattern"). Also, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" is called a small hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach performance is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach performance such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and similar to super reach, normal reach α, normal reach β, . A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Also, as for the super reach variation patterns, three or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach α, super reach β, and super reach γ may be provided.

As shown in FIG. 8-6, for the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment is executed, the super reach fluctuation pattern super reach α, super reach β is set shorter than Also, for the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach variation pattern in which the reach production of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β in the present embodiment is executed, the variation pattern in which the super reach production of super reach β is executed Toku-zu fluctuation time is set longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach production of super reach α is executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as described above, super reach β, super reach α, since it is set so that the degree of expectation of the big hit becomes higher in the order of the variable display result "big hit", the normal reach variation pattern and In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, as will be described later, these variation patterns are classified into types of variation patterns, such as non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, etc. Instead of first determining and then determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, only the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is determined without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and these variations After determining the type of the variation pattern from the random number value for determining the pattern type, the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

Further, in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-6, the variation content (performance content) is determined in advance for each variation pattern. This is not a limitation, and even if the variation pattern is the same, the content of variation (content of presentation) may differ according to the set value. For example, in the case of the normal reach loss variation pattern PA2-1, if the set value is 1, the normal reach variation pattern will be lost, and if the set value is 2, a pseudo-continuous effect will be performed. If the set value is 3 as a variation pattern that results in non-reach loss by executing twice, a variation pattern that results in super reach loss by executing pseudo-continuous effect three times, and so on may be used.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes programs read from the ROM 101, and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of various random numbers used on the main substrate 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. In addition, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main substrate 11, and variation patterns of each symbol in variable display such as special symbols and normal symbols. A variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, a first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), a second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. In addition to the big hit type determination table (for the first special design) shown in -8 (A), the big hit type determination table (for the second special design) shown in Fig. 8-8 (B), the big hit variation pattern determination table, the small hit A fluctuation pattern determination table, a deviation fluctuation pattern determination table, a normal diagram display result determination table (not shown), a normal diagram fluctuation pattern determination table (not shown), etc. are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment is configured such that the probability of winning a big hit (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing to be described later, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit (ball output rate) is changed. . The setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, and 6 is the highest ball payout rate, and the smaller the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the ball payout rate is. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the advantage is. In other words, the set value is such that 6, which is the largest value, is the most unfavorable value for the game hall side, and 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1 are values that are advantageous to the game hall side as the values become smaller in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. Become.

FIGS. 8-7(A) and 8-7(B) are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination tables. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set for each set value. In the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, separate display result determination tables are used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. A common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 1 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 1 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 2 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, if the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1383 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 2 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, if the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1383 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 3 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the range of 0 to 65535 when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1272 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 3 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the range of 0 to 65535 when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1272 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 4 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the range of 0 to 65535 when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 4 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, if the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". Further, when the gaming state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 5 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, if the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 5 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the range of 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 6 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 6 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, if the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As described above, in each display result determination table, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more determination values than when it is a normal state or time saving state (low probability state), It is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot". As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) where the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, the determined probability (in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, 1/300 when the setting value is 1, 1/280 when the setting value is 2, 1/260 when the setting value is 3, setting 1/240 when the value is 4, 1/220 when the set value is 5, and 1/200 when the set value is 6), the special figure display result is set as "big win" and controlled to a big win game state. Then, the probability of being determined increases (in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, 1/200 when the set value is 1, 1/180 when the set value is 2, and 1/180 when the set value is 3). 160, 1/140 when the set value is 4, 1/120 when the set value is 5, and 1/100 when the set value is 6). That is, in each display result determination table, when the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is the probability variable state (high probability state), the probability that it is determined to control to the jackpot game state compared to the normal state or time-saving state. is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control to the jackpot game state.

In addition, in the characteristic unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-7, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the variable probability state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is different depending on each setting value (for example, setting If the value is 1, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the variable state to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the short-time state is 1.5 times, and if the setting value is 2, the probability of the jackpot in the variable state to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the short-time state. The magnification is about 1.56 times, and if the setting value is 3, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the variable probability state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state is 1.625 times). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the magnification of the jackpot probability in the variable probability state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time-saving state at each set value is all set to be constant (for example, 5 times). good too.

In addition, in each first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability that the special figure display result is set to "small win" and controlled to the small win game state is the same value. A judgment value is assigned as follows. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is regarded as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or setting value. The probability of being determined to control to the game state is set to 1/200.

On the other hand, in each second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state is the first special figure. Determination values are assigned so as to be the same values different from those in the graphic display result determination table. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), in the second special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is regarded as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or setting value. The probability of being determined to control to the game state is set to 1/100.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" regardless of the setting value is the same probability. , The present invention is not limited to this, and may vary the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to a small hit game state as a "small hit" according to the set value. Furthermore, in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" according to the variation special figure is exemplified. The invention is not limited to this, and the probability of determining that the special figure display result is controlled to the small winning game state as "small hit" regardless of the variable special figure may be the same probability.

Here, focusing on the numerical range of the hit determination value assigned to the "big hit" and "small hit" in each display result determination table, the first special figure display result in the case where the game state is the normal state or the time saving state In the determination table, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set as the common value range of the big hit determination values for determining the big hit regardless of the set value.

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, if the setting value is 1, the value in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, common Numbers within the numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a big hit increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the judgment value of the big hit (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values determines the small hit regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1346), with 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value) for the small hit determination value, 32767 to 33094 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

Next, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the range of 1020 to 1346 among the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the big hit regardless of the set value. is set to a common numeric range for

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (up to 1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, in the first special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is a variable probability state, when the setting value is 1, the value can be in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, the common numerical range A number within the range plus the non-common number range is assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the reference as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set to 1020 as a reference value (jackpot reference value) for the jackpot determination value, and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, thereby increasing the probability. go.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the same as the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, hit determination value Among them, the range from 32767 to 33094 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1674), with 32767 as the reference value for the small hit determination value (small hit reference value), 32767 to 33094 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the big hit regardless of the set value. is set to a common numeric range for

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, in the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the setting value is 1, the value in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, common Numbers within the numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set to 1020 as a reference value (jackpot reference value) for the jackpot determination value, and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, thereby increasing the probability. go.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values determines the small hit regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1346), with 32767 as the reference value of the small hit determination value (small hit reference value), 32767 to 33421 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

Next, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the range of 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. is set to a common numeric range for

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (up to 1020 to 1346 is assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for FIG. Of the judgment values, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, Numerical values within the range plus the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpots." Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the reference as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set to 1020 as a reference value (jackpot reference value) for the jackpot determination value, and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, thereby increasing the probability. go.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the same as the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, hit determination value Among them, the range from 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1674), with 32767 as the reference value of the small hit determination value (small hit reference value), 32767 to 33421 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

As described above, in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, in each display result determination table, regardless of the game state and the setting value, the common numerical range or the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are determined based on the hit determination value of 1020. The determination value included in the continuous numerical range of 1 is defined as the numerical range of the jackpot determination value, and regardless of the game state and the set value, the continuous numerical range of 1 based on the hit determination value of 32767 (common The variable display result is determined with the determination value included in the numerical range) as the numerical range of the small hit determination value.

Furthermore, in each of these display result determination tables, if the variation special figure is the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is identical). In addition, depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs (small value in the display result judgment table for the first special figure) The number of determination values included in the numerical range of the hit determination value is 328, while the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the second special figure display result determination table is about 655. 2 times) On the other hand, the numerical range itself of the small hit determination value is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value).

Furthermore, as described above, in each game state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the probability that the special figure display result is set to "big win" and controlled to the big win game state is determined. Judgment values are assigned so that the higher the value of the set value is, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be controlled to the big hit game state as "big hit" (jackpot probability: set value 6 > set value 5>setting value 4>setting value 3>setting value 2>setting value 1).

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value set at that time, and if the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hit, the big hit (big hit) with respect to the special symbol. It is determined to be A to big hit C). Also, when MR1 coincides with one of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big win and the small win is determined with the probability corresponding to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIG. 8-7 indicates the probability (percentage) of a big win and the probability (percentage) of a small win. Also, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control to the big win game state, but the stop symbols on the first special symbol display device 153SG004A or the second special symbol display device 153SG004B It is also to decide whether or not to make it a big hit pattern. Also, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control to a small winning game state, but the stop at the first special symbol display device 153SG004A or the second special symbol display device 153SG004B It is also to decide whether or not the design is to be a small winning design.

In addition, in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, a total of six setting values 1 to 6 are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this. , the number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more.

Figure 8-8 (A) and Figure 8-8 (B) are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101 is. Of these, FIG. 8-8 (A) determines the jackpot type using the reserved memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning port (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed) This is a table for when In addition, FIG. 8-8 (B) determines the jackpot type using the reserved memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed) This is a table of cases.

The jackpot type determination table selects a jackpot type from jackpot A to jackpot C based on a hit type determination random number (MR2) when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern. This table is referenced to determine

Here, the jackpot type in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-9. In the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, as the jackpot type, only time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game state ends and the jackpot A (also referred to as a non-probability variable jackpot) that shifts to a low-probability-high base state, and the jackpot game. A big hit B and a big hit C (also referred to as a variable probability big hit) are set in which high-probability control and time-saving control are executed after the game ends and the state shifts to a high-probability-high base state.

The jackpot game state by the "jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which five rounds (so-called five rounds) are repeated to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. B" is a normal open big win in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) are repeated to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. Furthermore, the big win game state by the "big win C" is a normal open big win in which 15 rounds (so-called 15 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated.

The time saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state by "jackpot A" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment), or the special figure game of the predetermined number of times Before the game is executed, the game ends by entering a jackpot game state.

On the other hand, the high-precision control and time-saving control executed after the end of the big win game state of the big win B or big win C are continuously executed until the big win occurs again after the big win game state ends. Therefore, when the reoccurring big win is the big win B or the big win C, the high accuracy control and the short-time control are executed again after the big win game state ends, so that the big win game state is continuous without going through the normal state. It is a so-called continuous state that occurs in

In addition, in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, three types of jackpot A to jackpot C are provided as jackpot types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there are two jackpot types. You may provide less than a kind or four kinds or more.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-8 (A), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), 0 to 99 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 are assigned to the jackpot A. 100 to 249 are assigned to the jackpot B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8-8 (B), in the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol), 0 to 99 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 are assigned to the big hit A. 100 to 199 are assigned to the jackpot B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. That is, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, while the determination ratio of the jackpot type differs depending on whether the winning opening in which the game ball has won is the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening , regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the jackpot type is determined at a common ratio.

In addition, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot type is determined using MR2, which is a random number for judging the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is You may determine using MR1 which is a random number value for special figure display result determination.

In addition, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns.

Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern determination table for big hits used when it is determined in advance that the variable display result will be a "big hit", and the variable display result will be a "small hit". A big hit variation pattern determination table used when it is determined in advance, and a variation pattern determination table for loss used when it is determined in advance that the variable display result will be "loss" are prepared in advance. ing.

In the jackpot variation pattern determination table, each variation pattern of the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3) On the other hand, a predetermined random number within the range that the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value.

As shown in FIGS. 8-10 (A) and 8-10 (B), as the jackpot variation pattern determination table, the jackpot variation pattern determination table (jackpot A ) and a big-hit variation pattern judgment table (for big-hit B, big-hit C) used when the big-hit types are for big-hit B and big-hit C are prepared in advance. A) and big hit variation pattern judgment table (for big hit B, big hit C), the variation pattern of normal reach big hit (PB1-1), the variation pattern of super reach α big hit (PB1-2), the variation pattern of super reach β big hit A predetermined random number within the possible range of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is assigned as a determination value to each variation pattern of the variation patterns (PB1-3).

As shown in FIG. 8-10 (A), in the big hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit A), 1 to 400 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are normal reach big hit variation patterns (PB1 -1), 401 to 850 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 851 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). assigned.

As shown in FIG. 8-10 (B), in the jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), 1 to 200 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are fluctuations of the normal reach jackpot. It is assigned to the pattern (PB1-1), 201 to 550 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 551 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1- 3).

In addition, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, for the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1), a predetermined random value out of the range that the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is the determination value. assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (C), in the small hit variation pattern determination table, 0 to 997 out of the range 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are small hit variation patterns ( PC1-1). In addition, although only PC1-1 is provided as a small hit variation pattern in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more small hit variation patterns are provided. may be provided.

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss, the variation pattern determination table A for loss used when the number of pending memories is 1 or less in the low base state where the time saving control is not performed, and the low base Loss variation pattern determination table B used when the total number of reserved memories is 2 to 4 in the state, and loss variation used when the total number of reserved memories is 5 to 8 in the low base state A pattern determination table C and a loss variation pattern determination table D used when the game state is a high base state in which time reduction control is performed are prepared in advance.

In the variation pattern determination table for loss A, the variation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening (PA1-1), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), the super A predetermined random number is assigned as a judgment value to the variation pattern (PA2-3) of the reach β deviation within the range of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 8-11 (A), in the variation pattern determination table A for loss (for 1 or less total pending storage in low base), 1 to 450 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 Up to is assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are super reach α out of It is assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-3) of super reach β deviation.

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss B, the variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss corresponding to the total number of retained memories of 2 to 4 (PA1-2), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), super A predetermined random value is assigned as a judgment value from the range that the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take for the fluctuation pattern of reach α deviation (PA2-2) and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β deviation (PA2-3). It is

As shown in FIG. 8-11 (B), in the variation pattern determination table B for loss (for 2 to 4 total pending memories in low base), 1 to Up to 500 is assigned to the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2), 501 to 700 is assigned to the normal reach variation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 is super reach α. , and 901 to 997 are assigned to the deviation pattern (PA2-3) of Super Reach β.

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss C, the variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss corresponding to the total number of retained memories of 5 to 8 (PA1-3), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), super A predetermined random value is assigned as a judgment value from the range that the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take for the fluctuation pattern of reach α deviation (PA2-2) and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β deviation (PA2-3). It is

As shown in FIG. 8-11 (C), in the variation pattern determination table C for loss (for 5 or more total pending memories in low base), 1 to 550 in the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 Up to is assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are super reach α out of 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β deviation fluctuation pattern (PA2-3).

In addition, in the deviation pattern determination table D, the variation pattern of the shortened non-reach deviation corresponding to the time saving control (PA1-4), the variation pattern of the normal reach deviation (PA2-1), and the super reach α variation pattern of deviation (PA2-2), a predetermined random number within the possible range of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is assigned as the determination value to the variation pattern (PA2-3) that is out of super reach β.

As shown in FIG. 8-11 (D), in the variation pattern determination table D (for high base medium) for deviation, 1 to 550 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are fluctuations of non-reach deviation It is assigned to the pattern (PA1-4), 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are super reach α deviation deviation pattern (PA2-2) , and 901 to 997 are assigned to the deviation pattern (PA2-3) of super reach β.

Thus, when using the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to D for loss, the ratio of determining the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern is set higher than the ratio of deciding the super reach fluctuation pattern. Also, when using the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to D for deviation, 701 to 900 of the judgment values are super reach α deviation fluctuation patterns, and 901 to 997 are super reach β deviations, regardless of the fluctuation pattern determination table. Assigned to each variation pattern, that is, if the variable display result is a loss, the variation pattern of super reach is determined by a common determination ratio, so the variable display by the variation pattern of super reach is not executed. It is possible to prevent the effect from decreasing.

In the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the super reach α loss variation pattern and the determination ratio of the super reach β loss variation pattern as the loss variation pattern are completely the same between the set values. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach α and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach β are between each set value may be slightly different (for example, about 1%).

In addition, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is lost, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach is the same, but the present invention is limited to this. If the variable display result is not a thing, the determination ratio of all variation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach may be the same, and any variation between non-reach and normal reach Only the determining proportions of the patterns may be identical.

The variation pattern (PA1-2) of non-reach deviation is shorter than the variation pattern (PA1-1) of non-reach deviation without shortening, and the fluctuation time is shorter than the fluctuation pattern (PA1-2). The deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-3) has a shorter fluctuation time (see FIG. 8-6). Therefore, when the number of retained memories increases, a non-reach variation pattern with a short variation time is determined, making it easier to digest the retained memories, and the number of retained memories reaches the upper limit number of 4. By starting winning when there is no reserve memory, it becomes difficult to generate useless starting prizes that are not stored, and when the number of pending memories is reduced, the fluctuation time is long. Determining the pattern (PA1-1) lengthens the variable display time, thereby preventing the loss of interest in the game due to the non-execution of the variable display.

Further, in the characteristic unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. Although the mode for determining the pattern is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of pending memories in the special symbol to be changed (for example, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the first A variation pattern may be determined using a different variation pattern determination table for losing according to the reserved memory number of special symbols, or the reserved memory number of the second special symbol when variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

Further, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, whether or not to execute the ready-to-win effect for each determined variation pattern and which ready-to-win effect to execute are associated one-to-one. , The present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not the production control CPU 120 executes the reach production based on the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern, the variable display result, etc., and which reach production is executed It may be determined by lottery.

The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 8-1 may be a backup RAM partially or wholly backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, the contents of part or all of the RAM 102 are preserved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply becomes unable to supply power). be. In particular, at least data (such as a special process flag) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be saved in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the game is restored after a power failure or the like. Data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

Next, the display of the display monitor 153SG029 in the characteristic portion 153SG of this embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 8-12(A), the display monitor 153SG029 includes a first display section 153SG029A, a second display section 153SG029B, a third display section 153SG029C, and a fourth display section 153SG029D. Each of the first display portion 153SG029A to the fifth display portion 153SG29E is composed of 7 segments composed of 7 segments that draw the figure "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the 7 segments. These first display section 153SG029A to fifth display section 153SG29E are capable of lighting and blinking in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white. It is also possible to display different colors or a so-called rainbow while changing these colors in an extremely short period.

In addition, the display control of the display monitor 153SG029 in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment is executed using the area outside the test object in the entire area of the ROM 101 and RAM 102 during the test of the pachinko game machine 1. .

On the display monitor 153SG029, as shown in FIGS. 8-12 (B) and 8-12 (C), the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) for each out 6000 balls in all game states Base L which is (real time value during measurement), Base 1 which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) every 1st out 6000 balls in all game states, and Base 1 in all game states Base 2, which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low-probability/low-probability base state) for every 2nd out-out every 6000 balls, and the normal state (low-probability-low-probability base state) for every 3rd out (low-probability/low-probability base state) in all game states. Base 3, which is the base value calculated in , can be displayed. Base L, Base 1, Base 2, and Base 3 are displayed in percentages on display monitor 153SG029.

When actually displaying the base L on the display monitor 153SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display section 153SG029A and "L. ” is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from “00” to “99”) are displayed in the third display portion 153SG029C and the fourth display portion 153SG029D. When displaying the base 1 on the display monitor 153SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display section 153SG029A and "1." is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from "00" to "99") are displayed in the third display portion 153SG029C and the fourth display portion 153SG029D. When displaying the base 2 on the display monitor 153SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display section 153SG029A and "2." is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from "00" to "99") are displayed in the third display portion 153SG029C and the fourth display portion 153SG029D. Further, when displaying the base 3 on the display monitor 153SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display section 153SG029A and "3." is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from "00" to "99") are displayed in the third display portion 153SG029C and the fourth display portion 153SG029D.

In the display monitor 153SG029 of the present embodiment, the main substrate 11 (CPU 103) controls to sequentially display these base L, base 1, base 2, and base 3. FIG. For example, the main substrate 11 performs control to switch the display of the display monitor 153SG029 in the order of base L→base 1→base 2→base 3 at intervals of 5 seconds. In addition, the display color of each base value on the display monitor 153SG029 differs according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG. Specifically, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1", each base value on the display monitor 153SG029 is displayed in white, and the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed in white. When it is "2", each base value is displayed in blue on the display monitor 153SG029, and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is "3", each base value on the display monitor 153SG029 is displayed in yellow. When the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "4", each base value on the display monitor 153SG029 is displayed in green, and the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed in green. 5", each base value is displayed in red on the display monitor 153SG029, and when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is "6", each base value in the display monitor 153SG029 is displayed in purple. indicate. Therefore, the game parlor clerk or the like can identify the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 only by confirming the display color of the display monitor 153SG029, without the CPU 103 executing the setting value change processing described later. ing.

The RAM 122 mounted on the production control board 12 shown in FIG. A data holding area 153SG190 is provided. The production control data holding area 153SG190 shown in FIG. 8-13 (A) includes a production control flag setting unit 153SG191, a production control timer setting unit 153SG192, a production control counter setting unit 153SG193, and a production control buffer setting unit 153SG194. I have it.

The effect control flag setting unit 153SG191 stores a plurality of types of effect operation states, such as the display state of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, and states that can be updated according to effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example. is flagged. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 153SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an ON state or an OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 153SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as display operations of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 153SG192 stores data indicating a timer value in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The production control counter setting unit 153SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various production operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 153SG193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 153SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 153SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In the characterizing section 153SG of the present embodiment, the data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 153SG194A as shown in FIG. In the start winning command buffer 153SG194A, the storage area corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special figure reserved memory (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" corresponding area) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number "1-0") corresponding to the first special figure in the variable display. In addition, in the start winning reception command buffer 153SG194A, the storage area (buffer number "2-1" to "2-4 ”) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) corresponding to the second special figure being displayed in a variable manner. When there is a start prize to the first start prize mouth or the second start prize mouth, start mouth prize designation command (first start mouth prize designation command or second start mouth prize designation command), pattern designation command, variation category designation Four commands, a command and a pending memory number notification command (first pending memory number notification command or second pending memory number notification command), are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer 153SG194A are these starting entrance winning designation command, symbol designation command, variation category designation command, A storage area (entry) is reserved for storing the number of pending memories notification command in association with the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) are changed later when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the highest reserved storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. , and the storage contents of the buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0" storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are displayed in the variable display. It is designed to be cleared in the decorative design variation stop process executed when ending.

Furthermore, in the start-winning reception command buffer 153SG194A in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, a flag value corresponding to the display pattern (display mode) of the pending memory display in the later-described pre-reading notice setting process (FIGS. 8-18) is secured for each storage area (entry).

It should be noted that the pending display flag stores "0" corresponding to the display pattern of the normal pending memory display when execution of the pending display prior notice effect is not determined in the pre-reading notice setting process to be described later. By doing so, when the suspension memory display of the normal display mode (for example, white circle) is displayed in the first suspension memory display area 153SG005D and the second suspension memory display area 153SG005U, and execution of the suspension display notice effect is determined is "1" (square (◇)) or "2" (star ( ☆)) or special mode (for example, blue or red camera) by setting "3" (blue camera) or "4" (red camera) corresponding to the display pattern of the pending memory display, is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 153SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 153SG005U. The possibility of a ready-to-win situation and the high possibility of execution of a setting suggestion performance suggesting the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 are announced.

The effect control CPU 120 stores a command from the beginning (the entry with the smallest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage of the start winning reception command buffer 153SG194A at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening. Then, at the time of starting winning to the second starting winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage of the reception command buffer 153SG194A at the time of starting winning. go. At the time of starting winning, from the starting opening winning designation command to the reservation storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, if the command is received, the starting entrance winning designation command , pattern designation command, variation category designation command, and reserved storage number notification command.

The command stored in the start winning reception command buffer 153SG194A shown in FIG. 8-13 (B) is an entry (buffer Entry number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry (buffer number "1-1" or "2-0") corresponding to the pending storage of the variable display to start -1”) and the storage contents of the entries after the pending storage of the variable display to start are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 8-13 (B), when the variable display of the decoration pattern of the first special figure reservation storage is completed, each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, and the buffer number Each command stored in "1" is shifted to buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1". The commands shifted and stored in areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, the buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending storage that is being variably displayed at that time.

Next, the game control main processing in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8-14 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103. FIG. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (153SGSa001). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (153SGSa002). The initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.) register setting, and setting to make the RAM 102 accessible.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (107SGSa003) and whether the RAM 102 (backup RAM) is normal (107SGSa004). If the backup data is not stored (153SGSa003; N) or if the RAM 102 is not normal (153SGSa004; N), proceed to 153SGSa017, if the backup data is stored and the RAM 102 is normal (153SGSa003; Y, 153SGSa004; Y) further determines whether the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any one of 1 to 6, that is, whether the RAM 102 stores a normal set value (153SGSa005).

If the setting value stored in RAM 102 is not one of 1 to 6 (153SGSa005; N), proceed to 153SGSa017, and if the setting value stored in RAM 102 is any one of 1 to 6 (153SGSa005; Y) is whether or not a set value changing flag indicating that a set value change process (to be described later) was being executed before the power interruption (power interruption occurred during execution of the set value change process) is set. (153SGSa006). If the set value changing flag is set (153SGSa006; Y), proceed to 153SGSa017. If it is set, the RAM clear flag is cleared (153SGSa007), and it is determined whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko game machine 1 is started while the clear switch is being operated. (153SGSa008).

If the clear switch is ON (153SGSa008; Y), set the RAM clear flag and proceed to 153SGSa011 (153SGSa010). move on.

At 153SGSa011, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 153SG051 is ON (153SGSa011). If the lock switch 153SG051 is ON (153SGSa011; Y), it is further determined whether or not the open sensor 153SG090 is ON (153SGSa012). When the open sensor 153SG090 is ON, that is, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in a state where the lock switch 153SG051 is ON and the game machine frame 153SG003 is opened (153SGSa012; Y), the RAM clear flag is set. (153SGSa013a).

If the RAM clear flag is set (153SGSa013a; Y), set value change processing (153SGSa013b) for changing the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed to proceed to 153SGSa013d, RAM clear flag is not set (153SGSa013a; N), the setting value confirmation process (153SGSa013c) for confirming the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to 153SGSa013d.

In the set value change process (153SGSa013b), the CPU 103 first displays the currently set set value on the display monitor 153SG029. Next, every time the setting switch 153SG052 is operated, the setting values are updated and displayed on the display monitor 153SG029. Then, when the lock switch 153SG051 is turned off, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 153SG029 is updated and stored in the RAM 102, and the setting value newly updated and stored in the RAM 102 is specified by specifying the setting value. A command is output to the effect control CPU 120 .

Also, in the set value confirmation process (153SGSa013c), the CPU 103 displays the currently set set values on the display monitor 153SG029. Then, when the lock switch 153SG051 is turned off, the display of the set values on the display monitor 153SG029 is ended.

If the lock switch 153SG051 is OFF at 153SGSa011 (153SGSa011; N) or if the open sensor is OFF (153SGSa012; N), the process proceeds to 153SGSa013d without executing the processes of 153SGSa013a to 153SGSa013c.

At 153SGSa013d, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not the RAM 102 is cleared when the pachinko game machine 1 is started this time (RAM clear processing (153SGSa009) is executed) or not ( 153SGSa013d). If the RAM clear flag is set (153SGSa013d; Y), the RAM clear process (153SGSa013e) is executed, and then the process proceeds to 153SGSa014; if the RAM clear flag is not set (153SGSa013d; N), the RAM clear process (153SGSa013e) without executing, go to 153SGSa014.

In the RAM clearing process (153SGSa013e), the CPU 103 executes the process of setting "00H" to all addresses except the address where the setting value is stored and the address where the RAM clear flag is stored (set). . That is, in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in 153SGSa001 to 153SGSa013e and 153SGSa017 to 153SGSa021 described later, when there is no abnormality in the RAM 102, the address where the set value is stored and the RAM clear flag are stored. It is designed to clear the contents of all addresses except addresses that are

At 153SGSa014, the CPU 103 determines again whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (153SGSa014). If the RAM clear flag is set (153SGSa014; Y), proceed to 153SGSa022; (153SGSa015).

In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents of the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed-up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be Then, the CPU 103 assumes that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been restored to the state before the power failure (activated by hot start), and transmits a restoration command including a hot start notification command to the performance control board 12, and proceeds to 153SGSa028. (153SGSa016).

Also, at 153SGSa017, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started while the clear switch is being operated (153SGSa017). If the clear switch is ON (153SGSa017; Y), it is further determined whether the lock switch 153SG051 is ON (153SGSa018) and whether the open sensor 153SG090 is ON (153SGSa019).

When the lock switch 153SG051 is ON (153SGSa018; Y) and the open sensor 153SG090 is ON, that is, there is no backup data in the RAM 102, the RAM 102 is not normal, or normal setting values are not set. However, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started according to a formal procedure by the operation of an employee of the game hall (the game machine frame 153SG003 is opened, the lock switch 153SG051 is turned ON, and the clear switch is operated, the pachinko game is played. When the machine 1 is started), the setting values stored in the RAM 102 are cleared (153SGSa020), and if the setting value changing flag is set, the setting value changing flag is cleared (153SGSa021). Then, the processes 153SGSa009 to 153SGSa016 described above are executed.

If the clear switch is OFF (153SGSa017; N), if the lock switch 153SG051 is OFF (153SGSa018; N), and if the open sensor 153SG090 is OFF (153SGSa019; N), the process proceeds to 153SGSa031.

In addition, at 2078SGSa022, the CPU 103 transmits a recovery command including a cold start notification command to the effect control board 12 assuming that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been activated by cold start (153SGSa022). Then, a cold start notification timer corresponding to the period for notifying the cold start of the pachinko game machine 1 is set (153SGSa023), and the cold start notification is started by starting flashing of all the segments constituting the display monitor 153SG029. (153SGSa024).

After executing 153SGSa024, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the cold start notification timer by 1 (153SGSa025), and determines whether or not the cold start notification timer has timed out (153SGSa026). When the cold start notification timer has not timed out (153SGSa026; N), the processing of 153SGSa025 and 153SGSa026 is repeatedly executed, and when the cold start notification timer has timed out (153SGSa026; Y), all segments in the display monitor 153SG029 stops blinking (153SGSa027) and proceeds to 153SGSa028.

In addition, in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, an example is illustrated in which all segments constituting the display monitor 153SG029 are flashed over the period of the cold start notification timer (for example, 5 seconds) at the time of calling and starting the pachinko game machine 1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the pachinko game machine 1 is called and started, only a part of all the segments constituting the display monitor 153SG029 may be blinked. Alternatively, at least some of all the segments forming the display monitor 153SG029 may be illuminated.

Then, in 153SGSa028, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process (153SGSa028) for initializing the random number circuit 104, and the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). The built-in CTC register is set (153SGSa029), and the interrupt is enabled (153SGSa030). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

In addition, at 153SGSa031, the CPU 103 is based on the fact that an abnormal set value is stored in the RAM 102 (set value abnormal error), or the recovery from the power failure during the setting change described later. Then, an error designation command corresponding to the abnormality of the set value is transmitted (153SGSa031). Further, an error notification execution waiting timer is set (153SGSa032). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the error notification execution waiting timer by 1 (153SGSa033), and determines whether or not the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (153SGSa034). If the error notification execution waiting timer has not timed out (153SGSa034; N), the processing of 153SGSa033 and 153SGSa034 is repeatedly executed, and if the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (153SGSa034; Y), a set value abnormal error 153SG029A, the second display 153SG029B, the third display 153SG029C, and the fourth display 153SG029D, which constitute the display monitor 153SG029, as notification (error notification) of the recovery from the power failure during the occurrence of or setting change. , "E." is displayed (153SGSa035).

In addition, the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 153SG004A and the second special symbol display device 153SG004B (153SGSa036), and the game is played through the terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko game machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a field management computer, and the process proceeds to 153SGSa032 (153SGSa037). Thereafter, the CPU 103 repeats the processing of 153SGSa032 to 153SGSa037 until power failure occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off by the operation of a store clerk, etc.), thereby displaying a display monitor 153SG029. , the first special symbol display device 153SG004A and the second special symbol display device 153SG004B execute error occurrence notification.

In this way, the pachinko game machine 1 in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, when an abnormal set value is set or when the power failure during the change of the set value is restored, the display monitor 153SG029, the first Since the special symbol display device 153SG004A and the second special symbol display device 153SG004B notify the occurrence of an error, the staff at the game parlor can check the occurrence of the error and the setting value from both the front side and the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to recognize recovery from power failure during change. In addition, the occurrence of an error in the pachinko game machine 1 and recovery from a power failure during the change of the set value can be recognized even in the management device of the game hall, so that the security of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved. It's becoming

It should be noted that, in the game control main processing of the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. Although the form of executing the RAM clear processing (153SGSa009) after clearing the flag is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear processing , when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 153SGSa008 (153SGSa008; Y), or when it is determined that the RAM clear flag is set in 153SGSa014 (153SGSa014 ;Y).

FIG. 8-15 is a flow chart showing the start winning determination process (S101) executed by the CPU 103 in the special symbol process process shown in FIG. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. (153SGS101). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is on (153SGS101; Y), the first special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value ( For example, it is determined whether or not "4" as the upper limit storage number is reached (153SGS102). CPU103, for example by reading the first reservation memory number count value which is the stored value of the first reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit (not shown), it is sufficient to specify the number of first special figure reservation memory. 153SGS102 when the first special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value (153SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the starting mouth buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (not shown) is set to "1" (153SGS103 ).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off at 153SGS101 (153SGS101; N), and when the number of first special figure reservation storage reaches the upper limit at 153SGS102 (153SGS102; Y), the variable winning ball device 6B Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by , it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is ON (153SGS104). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is on (153SGS104; Y), the second special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value ( For example, it is determined whether or not "4" as the upper limit storage number is reached (153SGS105). CPU103, for example by reading the second reservation memory number count value which is the stored value of the second reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit (not shown), it is sufficient if it can specify the number of second special figure reservation memory. At 153SGS105, when the number of second special figure pending storage is not the upper limit value (153SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the starting port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (not shown) is set to "2" (153SGS106 ).

After executing either of the processes of 153SGS103 and 153SGS106, the number of special figure pending storage corresponding to the starting opening buffer value which is the stored value of the starting opening buffer is updated so as to add 1 (153SGS107). For example, when the starting buffer value is "1", 1 is added to the first reserved storage number count value, and when the starting buffer value is "2", 1 is added to the second reserved storage number count value. In this way, the first reserved memory number count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total reserved storage number is also updated by adding 1 (153SGS108). For example, the total pending memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit (not shown), may be updated so as to add 1.

After executing the process of 153SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit (not shown). Numerical data representing the random number MR2 for use and the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are extracted (153SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number extracted in this way is stored by being set as suspension information at the head of the empty entry in the special figure suspension storage unit corresponding to the starting opening buffer value (153SGS110). For example, when the start buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit (not shown), while when the start buffer value is "2" , Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in a second special figure reservation storage unit (not shown).

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the result of the special figure display and the random number MR2 for judging the type of the big hit determine whether or not the result of the fluctuation display of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be a "big hit", and whether or not the result of the fluctuation display is determined. It is used to determine the jackpot type in the case of "jackpot". The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variation display time of the special symbols and decorative symbols. By executing the process of 153SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the variable display results of the special symbols and decorative symbols and the variable display time.

Following the processing of 153SGS110, the transmission setting of the starting opening winning designation command according to the starting opening buffer value is performed (153SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. 12 for sending the first starting entry winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. Make settings for sending the second start winning designation command. The starting opening winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. be done.

Following the process of 153SGS111, the winning random number determination process is executed (153SGS112). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the pending storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (153SGS113). The reserved storage number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. be done.

After executing the process of 153SGS113, it is determined whether or not the start buffer value is "1" (153SGS114). At this time, if the start buffer value is "1" (Y at 153SGS114), the start buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (153SGS115), and then the process proceeds to 153SGS104. On the other hand, when the start buffer value is "2" (N at 153SGS114), the start buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (S116), then the start winning process is executed. finish. Thus, even when both the first starter switch 22A and the second starter switch 22B simultaneously detect valid starting winnings of game balls, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be reliably completed.

FIG. 8-16(A) is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed by 153SGS 112 in FIG. 8-15 as the winning random number determination process. In the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display of the special symbols and the decorative symbols is started, the special symbol normal processing (S110 in FIG. 5) changes the special symbol display result (variable display result of the special symbol) to " It is determined whether or not to control to the big hit game state as "big hit", whether to control to the small hit game state as the special figure display result as "small hit", and the like. Further, in the variation pattern setting process (S111 in FIG. 5), determination of a variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is performed. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected in the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening), the CPU 103 executes the winning random number determination process of 153SGS112. By, determination of whether or not to derive and display the big hit pattern as a special figure display result, determination of whether or not to derive and display the small winning pattern as a special figure display result, variable display mode of the decorative pattern determines whether or not is in a predetermined display mode with super reach. As a result, before the start of the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting winning hole, that is, at the start of the variable display, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit. Prior to that, it is determined whether the special figure display result is "big hit" or "small hit", and which category the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the variable display mode, and based on this determination result Then, the effect control CPU 120 or the like executes a pending display forewarning effect, as will be described later.

In the random number value determination process at the time of winning shown in FIG. 8-16 (A), the CPU 103 first checks the state of the time saving flag and the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit not shown, for example. The current gaming state of the gaming machine 1 is specified (153SGS121). When the variable probability flag is on, the CPU 103 specifies that it is in a variable probability state, and when the variable probability flag is off and the time saving flag is on, it specifies that it is in a time saving state, and both the probability changing flag and the time saving flag are off. Sometimes it is sufficient to specify that it is in a normal state.

Following the processing of 153SGS121, the display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-7 is selected and set (153SGS122). At this time, if the starting buffer value is 1, the CPU 103 sets the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-7(A), and if the starting buffer value is 2, FIG. The second special figure display result determination table shown in (B) may be set.

After that, referring to the jackpot numerical range (jackpot determination range) according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 in the set display result determination table, the special figure extracted at 153SGS109 in FIG. 8-15 It is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for display result determination is within the big hit determination range (153SGS123). In the jackpot judgment range, individual judgment values assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot" in the display result judgment table selected by the processing of 153SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 compares the random number MR1 and each judgment value. It is only necessary to determine whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random value MR1 by performing point-by-point comparison. Alternatively, numerical values indicating the minimum (lower limit) and maximum (upper limit) of the determination values included in the jackpot determination range are set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 and the minimum and maximum values of the jackpot determination range. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range by comparison. At this time, by determining that the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variation display result based on the reserved data including the random number MR1 is determined to be a "big hit".

When 153SGS123 determines that it is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined that the jackpot does not occur during variable display (153SGS123; N), it is further set to the pachinko game machine 1 in the set display result determination table. Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination extracted in 153SGS109 of FIG. It is determined whether or not it is within the small hit determination range (153SGS124). In the small hit judgment range, individual judgment values assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit" in the display result judgment table selected by the processing of 153SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 and each judgment value It is only necessary to determine whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random value MR1 by comparing the values one by one. Alternatively, by setting numerical values indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) of the determination value included in the small hit determination range, the CPU 103 generates the random number MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the small hit determination range It is sufficient if it can be determined whether or not the random number MR1 is within the small hit determination range by comparing with. At this time, by determining that the random number MR1 is within the small hit determination range, it can be determined that the variation display result based on the reserved data including the random number MR1 is determined to be a "small hit".

When it is determined that it is not within the small hit determination range at 153SGS124, that is, when it is determined that it does not become a small hit at the time of variable display (153SGS124; N), the variable display result is "miss". (153SGS125), and determines whether or not the time-saving flag is set, that is, whether the current game state is the time-saving state (153SGS126). If the time saving flag is not set (153SGS126; N), select and set the variation pattern determination table A for loss (153SGS127), and if the time saving flag is set (153SGS126; Y), the variation pattern for loss The decision table D is selected and set (153SGSS128).

Note that the deviation variation pattern determination table A is a deviation variation pattern determination table that is used when the number of pending memories is 1 or less, as shown in FIG. 8-11(A). In addition, the variation pattern determination table D for loss is a variation pattern determination table for loss used when the game state is a high base state in which time saving control is performed, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (D). be.

Note that in the characteristic unit 153SG of the present embodiment, in addition to these variation pattern determination table A for loss and variation pattern determination table D for loss, a loss that is used when the total number of pending memories is 2 to 4 A variation pattern determination table B for loss and a variation pattern determination table C for loss used when the total number of pending memories is 5 to 8 are prepared in advance, but as shown in FIG. Of the variation pattern determination tables A to C, in the variation pattern determination table A for loss, a value from 0 to 450 is assigned to the non-reach variation pattern in the range that the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take. In the variation pattern determination tables B and C for loss, a value exceeding 0 to 450 is assigned to the non-reach variation pattern within the possible range of the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination. On the other hand, in the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to C for losing, values from 701 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation patterns of super reach within the range of possible random number values MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment.

Therefore, by determining the variation pattern (variation category) using the variation pattern determination table A for loss in 153SGS132 described later, the determination of non-reach and super reach is always performed even if the number of retained memories changes after the determination. Since it becomes a variation pattern of non-reach or super reach, it is determined using the variation pattern determination table A for loss in the determination at the time of starting winning.

As shown in FIG. 8-16 (A), when 153SGS123 is determined to be within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined to be a jackpot at the time of variable display (153SGS123; Y), jackpot type determination The type of jackpot is determined based on the random number MR2 for (153SGS130). At this time, the CPU 103, according to the variable special figure ("first special figure" corresponding to "1" or "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified corresponding to the start buffer value , select table data for big hit type determination from the table data constituting the big hit type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected table data for judging big hit types, it is judged which of the plurality of types the big hit type is judged to be.

In addition, the transmission setting of the symbol designation command according to the big hit type determined in 153SGS130 is executed (153SG131), and the big hit variation pattern determination table is selected as a table for determining one of the plurality of big hit variation patterns. set (153SG132).

In addition, when it is determined that it is within the small hit determination range at 153SGS124, that is, when it is determined that it will be a small hit at the time of variable display (153SGS124; Y), a symbol designation command according to the small hit type is transmitted. Execute the setting (153SG129).

After executing any of the processes of 153SGS127, 153SGS128, 153SGS129, and 153SGS132, the fluctuation pattern determination table set in the processes of 153SGS127, 153SGS128, 153SGS129, and 153SGS132 and numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern and is used to determine a variation category according to the range of determination values including the random number MR3 (153SGS133). In the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. A variable category that becomes a variable display mode, a variable category that becomes a variable display mode of "super reach", and a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach and small hit) "Other" It is only necessary to provide a variation category and determine whether or not such a variation category is determined based on the random value MR3.

After that, after setting for transmitting the variable category designation command according to the determination result by the processing of 153SGS132 to the effect control board 12 (153SGS134), the random value determination processing at the time of winning is ended.

FIG. 8-17 is a part of the flow chart of the effect control process (S76) in the characteristic part 153SG of this embodiment. In the effect control process processing in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, after the execution of the prefetching notice setting processing (S161) shown in FIG. Any one of S170 to S177 shown in FIG. 7 after executing the pending display update process for updating the display mode and the number of display of the pending storage display according to the start winning reception command buffer 153SG194A shown in FIG. 8-13 (B) process is executed.

FIG. 8-18 is a flow chart showing the pre-reading notice setting process (S161) executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the effect control process shown in FIG. 8-17. In the pre-reading notice setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the contents of the start winning reception command buffer 153SG194A shown in FIG. (153SGS242). If there is no entry for which the pending display flag is not set, the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated. It is determined whether or not there is an entry that has been set (153SGS243).

If there is an entry whose pending display flag value is already set to any one of 1 to 4, that is, if the pending display notice effect has already been executed, the entry (153SGS242 has the pending display flag "0" corresponding to the non-execution of the pending display notice effect is set to the pending display flag of the entry determined as not being executed (that is, it is decided to display the pending memory display corresponding to the entry with "○"). to end the pre-reading notice setting process (153SGS251). As will be described later, the case where there is an entry whose value of the pending display flag is already set to any one of 1 to 4 means that the pending display notice effect has already been executed. That is, in the process of 153SGS243, when the suspension display forewarning effect has already been executed, execution of a new suspension display forewarning effect is restricted.

In 153SGS243, if there is no entry set to any of the values 1 to 4 of the pending display flag, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the entry (the entry determined that the pending display flag is not set in 153SGS242 ) indicates a big hit (153SGS244). When the pattern designation command of the entry indicates a big hit, the jackpot type is specified from the pattern designation command of the entry (153SGS245), and extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the production control counter setting unit 153SG193, for example. Based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pending display notice effect and the jackpot type specified in 153SGS245, by referring to a jackpot time pending display notice effect determination table (not shown), whether or not the hold display notice effect is executed and the hold display. A display pattern in the case of executing the advance notice effect is determined (153SGS246).

In 153SG246, for example, whether or not to execute the pending display announcement effect and the display pattern (announcement type) are determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 8-19(A). In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-19 (A), depending on the jackpot type specified in the process of 153SGS245, the presence or absence of the pending display notice effect and the determination ratio of the display pattern (notice type) are varied.

In the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, four types of display patterns (preview types) of the pending display pre-notice effect are provided: the display pattern α, the display pattern β, the display pattern γ, and the display pattern δ. Among these, when the display pattern of the pending display notice effect is determined to be the display pattern α, the pending memory display is displayed as a white square (◇) in the first pending memory display area 153SG005D or the second pending memory display area 153SG005U. When the display pattern of the pending display notice effect is determined to be the display pattern β, the pending memory display is displayed in the first pending memory display area 153SG005D or the second pending memory display area 153SG005U with a white star (☆). When the display pattern of the pending display notice effect is determined to be the display pattern γ, the pending memory display is displayed in the first pending memory display area 153SG005D or the second pending memory display area 153SG005U with the blue camera, and the pending display is performed. When the display pattern of the notice effect is determined to be the display pattern δ, the reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 153SG005D or the second reserved memory display area 153SG005U with the red camera. Further, when non-execution of the pending display notice effect is determined, the pending memory display is displayed in a white circle (○) in the first pending memory display area 153SG005D or the second pending memory display area 153SG005U.

Here, as shown in FIG. 8-19 (A), when the jackpot type is jackpot A (non-probable variable jackpot), non-execution of pending display notice effect is determined at a rate of 5%, and a rate of 55%. , the execution of the pending display forewarning effect in the display pattern α is determined, the execution of the pending display forewarning effect in the display pattern β is determined at a rate of 20%, and the pending display forecast effect in the display pattern γ is determined at a rate of 10%. is determined, and execution of the pending display forewarning effect in the display pattern δ is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, when the jackpot type is jackpot B or jackpot C (probability variable jackpot), non-execution of pending display notice effect is determined at a rate of 5%, and pending display notice effect with display pattern α is determined at a rate of 20%. Execution is determined, execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern β is determined at a rate of 55%, execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern γ is determined at a rate of 10%, and execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern γ is determined at a rate of 10% Execution of the pending display forewarning effect in the display pattern δ is determined.

Returning to 153SGS244, when the symbol designation command of the entry is a loss or a small hit, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the variation category from the variation category designation command of the entry (153SGS248), for example, the random number circuit 124 and effect control. Based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pending display notice effect extracted from the random counter of the counter setting unit 153SG193 and the big hit type specified in 153SGS249, a small hit/losing hold display notice effect determination table (not shown) is referred to. By doing so, it is determined whether or not to execute the pending display forewarning effect and the display pattern.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-19(B), when the variable display result is lost and the variable category is non-reach, the non-execution of the pending display notice effect is determined at a rate of 95%, Execution of the pending display forewarning effect in the display pattern α is determined at a rate of 5%, execution of the pending display forecast effect in the display pattern β is determined at a rate of 0%, and execution of the display pattern γ is determined at a rate of 0%. Execution of the pending display notice effect is determined, and execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern δ is determined at a rate of 0%. In addition, if the variable display result is a loss or a small hit and the variation category is other (normal reach is a loss or a small win), the non-execution of the pending display notice effect is determined at a rate of 75%, and 20%. Execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern α is determined at a rate of 5%, execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern β is determined at a rate of 5%, and pending display notice in the display pattern γ is determined at a rate of 0%. Execution of the effect is determined, and execution of the pending display forewarning effect in the display pattern δ is determined at a rate of 0%. In addition, when the variable display result is lost and the variable category is super reach, non-execution of the pending display notice effect is determined at a rate of 55%, and the pending display notice effect in the display pattern α is determined at a rate of 25%. Execution is determined, execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern β is determined at a rate of 10%, execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern γ is determined at a rate of 5%, and execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern γ is determined at a rate of 5%. Execution of the pending display forewarning effect in the display pattern δ is determined.

That is, as shown in FIGS. 8-19(A) and 8-19(B), in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, when the pending display notice effect is executed, when the pending display notice effect is not executed In addition to being controlled to the jackpot game state at a higher rate, when the pending display notice effect is executed in the display pattern β, than when the pending display notice effect is executed in the display pattern α The jackpot type is set to be the jackpot B or the jackpot C (probability variable jackpot) at a high rate. With such a setting, when the variable display result is "big hit" and the display pattern β is displayed as the display pattern (notice type), the jackpot type is higher than when the display pattern α is displayed. is the probability variable big hit, and the player's expectation for the probability variable big win can be increased.

Since the display pattern γ and the display pattern δ are display patterns that suggest the execution of the setting suggestion effect described later, the degree of expectation (big hit expectation) for being controlled to the big win gaming state than the display pattern α and the display pattern β. is not set to be high, and the degree of expectation (probability-variable degree of expectation for big win) for the type of big win to be big win B or big win C is the same.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, the variation patterns that can be determined when the variable display result is a big hit are the variation patterns of normal reach and super reach, and as shown in FIG. The case where the display pattern δ is determined is the case where the variable display result is a big hit or the variable display result is a loss and the variation category is super reach. In other words, the display pattern γ and the display pattern δ (the blue and red camera modes) are suggested to be super reach variable displays capable of executing a setting suggestion effect, which will be described later. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8-19 (B), when the variation category is non-reach or other (normal reach or small hit), that is, when it is determined that the special figure variation time is shorter than the super reach , the pending memory display is never displayed in the form of a blue or red camera.

Returning to FIG. 8-18, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the pending display notice effect is determined after executing the processing of 153SGS246 or 153SGS249 (153SGS250). When execution of the pending display notice effect is determined, a value (one of 1 to 4) corresponding to the display pattern determined by the processing of 153SGS246 or 153SGS249 is set in the pending display flag of the entry and prefetched. The advance notice setting process is terminated (153SGS247). When it is decided not to execute the pending display notice effect, the pending display flag of the entry is set to "0" corresponding to the non-execution of the pending display notice effect, and the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated ( 153SGS251).

FIG. 8-20 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (S171) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variation start command reception flag is set (153SGS271). If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is set (153SGS271; Y), the buffer number "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure reservation storage in the start winning time reception command buffer (not shown) Various command data and various flags stored in association (that is, various command data and various flags corresponding to the first special symbol being displayed in a variable manner, the first to fourth first special symbol reserved storage corresponding command data and various flags) are shifted upward by one buffer number (153SGS272). It should be noted that the contents of buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them, so they are erased.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-1", Various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" of the 1 special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2", and the first special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer numbers "1-3" and stored.

If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is not set in 153SGS271 (153SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (153SGS273). If the second fluctuation start command reception flag is not set (153SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (153SGS273; Y), Various command data and various flags (that is, variable display Various command data and various flags corresponding to the second special symbol, various command data and various flags corresponding to the first to fourth second special symbol reserved storage) are shifted upward by one buffer number. (153 SGS274). It should be noted that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them, so they are erased.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1", Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the 2 special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-2", and the second special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer number "2-3" and stored.

After executing 153SGS272 or 153SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (153SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop design) of the decorative design is determined according to the data stored in the display result designating command storage area (that is, the received display result designating command) (153SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop pattern of the decorative pattern according to the display result specified by the display result specifying command, and stores the data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. do.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 153SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the big hit A, the effect control CPU 120 determines, for example, that three symbols are even-numbered symbols as the stop symbols. A combination of matching decorative patterns (big hit pattern) is determined. Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the big hit B, a plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than "7" (for example, "111", " 333", "555", "999", etc.). Further, when the received variable display result specifying command is the fourth variable display result specifying command corresponding to the jackpot C, a combination of decorative patterns (jackpot pattern) in which three patterns are aligned with "7" is determined as the stop pattern. do. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to the small hit, the stop pattern is a chance eye (3 ("334", "556", "778", etc.) are determined. Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to the loss, the decorative symbols in which the three symbols are not aligned as the stop symbols are combinations other than the above-described chance symbols. (losing pattern) is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decoration symbols corresponding to a numerical value matching the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach (153SGS277). If the variation pattern of the variable display is not the super reach variation pattern, proceed to 153 SGS285, and if the variation pattern of the variable display is the super reach variation pattern, the rear variable display suggestive effect during the reach effect of the variable display. and which effect is to be executed as the suggestive effect during variable rear display is executed (153SGS278). That is, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in 153SGS277 to 153SG278, the suggestive effect during the rear variable display (big hit suggestive effect and setting suggestive effect) is the variation of the super reach variation pattern with a long special figure variation time. It can be executed only by display, and it is not executed by variable display of normal reach or non-reach fluctuation pattern with short special figure fluctuation time.

In addition, in the super reach variable display in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-28, the variable display result becomes a big hit as a suggestive effect during the front variable display from the start timing of the variable display. It is possible to execute a timer effect suggesting a character effect suggested by the character displayed on the image display device 5 or that the result of the variable display will be a big hit, and suggesting a period until the execution of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is started. , during the ready-to-win performance, which is the second half of the variable display, a jackpot suggesting performance suggesting that the result of the variable display will result in a big hit as a suggesting performance during the rear variable display, or a setting suggesting a set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. Suggestion production can be executed. In other words, the process of 153SGS278 is the process of determining whether or not to execute the suggestive effect during the rear variable display and which of the big win suggestive effect and the set suggestive effect to be executed during the ready-to-win effect as the suggestive effect during the rear variable display. .

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the suggestive effect during rear variable display (either the big hit suggestive effect or the set suggestive effect) is determined in the process of 153SGS278 (153SGS279). If it is determined in the processing of 153SGS278 that the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is not to be executed, the process proceeds to 153SGS285. A front part variable display suggestive effect determination process for determining which of the character effect and timer effect is to be executed as the suggestive effect during variable display is executed (153SGS280). That is, in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, the execution of the front variable display suggesting effect is not decided unless the execution of the rear variable display effect is decided. In variable display of reach and normal reach, no timer effect or character effect is executed as suggestive effect during front variable display.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the character effect has been determined as the suggestive effect during front variable display (153SGS281). When it is decided to execute the character effect as the suggestive effect during the front variable display, the period until the start of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is set to the timer for waiting for the start of the suggestive effect during the variable rear display (as shown in FIG. 8-28 (A)). After 5 seconds from the start of the ready-to-reach effect), proceed to 153SG285 (153SGS282), and if execution of the timer effect as the suggestive effect during the front variable display is determined, wait for the start of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display. The period until the start of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display on the timer (as shown in FIG. 8-28 (B), the value according to the effect pattern of the timer effect (specifically, the effect pattern of the timer effect is 25 seconds 5 seconds after the start of the ready-to-win effect if the pattern TS-1 is the period, and 10 seconds after the start of the ready-to-win effect if the pattern of the timer effect is the pattern TS-2 that is the effect period of 30 seconds) ) and proceed to 153SGS285 (153SGS283).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 selects the effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the variation pattern in 153SGS285. Then, the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table is started (153SGS286).

Note that the process table contains display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling lighting of each LED, and data for controlling sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). there is

Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display as a component for effect) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (153SGS287). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in this characterizing portion 153SG, the effect control CPU 120 controls so that the decoration pattern is displayed variably according to the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designation command one-to-one. A variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns corresponding to the specified command.

Then, a variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (153SGS288). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (153SGS289). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 writes to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing variable display (fluctuation) of the decoration pattern. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (S172), and the variable display start setting process is terminated (153SGS290).

FIG. 8-21 is a flow chart showing the suggestive effect determination process during rear variable display (153SGS278) in the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 8-20. 8-21, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the start winning reception command buffer 153SG194A shown in FIG. (153SGS301). In this process, when the first variable display start command reception flag is set, the value of the pending display flag of the entry "1-0" of the start winning reception command buffer 153SG194A is specified, and the second variable display start command reception flag is set. If the display start command reception flag is set, the entry "2-0" in the start winning reception command buffer 153SG194A may be specified.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the suggestive effect during the rear variable display and the effect to be executed as the suggestive effect during the variable rear display based on the value of the reserved display flag specified in 153SG301 (153SG302).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-22(A), when the value of the pending display flag specified in 153SGS301 is "0", that is, the pending display notice effect is executed for the variable display. If not, 90% of the ratio determines non-execution of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display, 10% determines the execution of the jackpot suggestive effect as the suggestive effect during the rear variable display, and 0% of the ratio determines the execution of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display. Execution of setting suggesting effect is determined as suggesting effect during variable display. Also, if the value of the pending display flag specified in 153SGS301 is "1" or "2", that is, the pending memory display is displayed in a white square or star as a pending display notice effect for the variable display. If it is, the non-execution of the suggestion performance during the rear variable display is determined at a rate of 50%, the execution of the jackpot suggestion performance as the suggestion performance during the rear variable display is determined at a rate of 50%, and the performance of the suggestion performance during the rear variable display is determined at a rate of 0%. Execution of setting suggesting effect is determined as suggesting effect during rear variable display.

Furthermore, if the value of the reserved display flag specified in 153SGS301 is "3", that is, if the reserved memory display is displayed by the blue camera as the reserved display notice effect for the variable display, 30 % determines non-execution of the suggestive performance during the rear variable display, 35% determines the execution of the jackpot suggestive performance as the suggestive performance during the variable rear display, and 35% as the suggestive performance during the variable rear display. Determines execution of the setting suggestion effect. Then, if the value of the reserved display flag specified in 153SGS301 is "4", that is, if the reserved memory display is displayed by the red camera as the reserved display notice effect for the variable display, 0 % determines non-execution of suggestive performance during variable rear display, 30% determines execution of jackpot suggestive performance as suggestive performance during variable rear display, and 70% as suggestive performance during variable rear display. Determines execution of the setting suggestion effect.

That is, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, when the pending display forewarning effect is executed for the variable display, it is more likely than when the pending display forecast effect is not executed for the variable display. It is set so that the execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is determined at a high rate. Furthermore, when the pending memory display is displayed by a blue or red camera as a pending display notice effect for the variable display (when the value of the pending display flag is "3" or "4"), Higher than when the pending memory display is displayed in a white square or star as a pending display notice effect for the variable display (when the value of the pending display flag is "1" or "2") It is set so that the execution of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is determined by a ratio, and the pending memory display is displayed as a white square or star as a pending display notice effect for the variable display. It is set so that execution of the setting suggestive effect is determined as the suggestive effect during the rear variable display at a higher rate than in the case.

In addition, attention is paid to the case where the pending memory display is displayed with a blue or red camera as a pending display notice effect for the variable display (when the value of the pending display flag is "3" or "4"). Then, if the pending memory display is displayed on the red camera as the pending display notice effect for the variable display, the pending memory display is displayed on the blue camera as the pending display notice effect for the variable display. It is set so that the execution of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is determined at a higher rate than when it was displayed as a camera, and the pending memory display is a blue camera as a pending display notice effect for the variable display. It is set so that the execution of the set suggestive effect is determined as the suggestive effect during the rear variable display at a higher rate than when it is displayed in .

From the above, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, when the pending memory display is displayed in a square or star shape as the pending display notice effect for the variable display, While it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the big hit suggestive effect is executed, the pending memory display is displayed by a blue or red camera as a pending display notice effect for the variable display. In this case, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the setting suggesting effect is executed as the suggesting effect during the rear variable display.

Furthermore, if the pending memory display is displayed on the red camera as the pending display notice effect for the variable display, the pending memory display is displayed on the blue camera as the pending display notice effect for the variable display. Since the ratio of execution of the setting suggesting effect as the suggesting effect during the rear variable display is higher than in the case where it is displayed as a rear variable display, the game is more concerned with whether the setting suggesting effect is executed as the suggesting effect during the rear variable display. It is designed to attract people's attention.

Returning to FIG. 8-21, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the suggestive effect during rear variable display has been determined in the process of 153SGS302 (153SGS303). If it is determined in the process of 153SGS302 that the suggestive effect during variable rear display is not to be executed, then the process of determining suggestive effect during variable rear display is terminated. , 153SGS302, it is determined whether or not execution of a jackpot suggestive effect is determined as a suggestive effect during rear variable display (153SGS304).

In the processing of 153SGS302, when the execution of the big hit suggestive effect as the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is determined, the effect pattern of the big hit suggestive effect is determined and stored based on the result of the variable display, and the suggestive effect determination process during the rear variable display is performed. End (153SGS305).

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 8-22(B), a total of three effect patterns from pattern AS-1 to pattern AS-3 are provided as effect patterns that can be determined in the process of 153SGS305. Of these production patterns, the pattern AS-1 is a production pattern (big hit expectation: low) that suggests that the ratio of the variable display result to a big win (big hit expectation) is the lowest, and the pattern AS-2 is: It is a production pattern (expectation for big win: medium) that suggests that the percentage of the variable display result that results in a big hit is higher than that of the pattern AS-1, and the pattern AS-3 has the highest percentage of the variable display result that results in a big hit. This is a production pattern that suggests high (big hit expectation: high).

Then, in the processing of 153SGS305 described above, as shown in FIG. 8-23, when the variable display result is a big hit, the production control CPU 120 sets the production pattern of the big hit suggestion production at a rate of 10% to the pattern AS-1. , pattern AS-2 is determined at a rate of 30%, and pattern AS-3 is determined at a rate of 60%.

On the other hand, in the process of 153SGS302, when it is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the RAM 122 and refers to the setting value specified command received from the CPU 103 (Pachinko game machine 1 (153SGS306). Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines and stores the effect pattern of the setting suggestive effect based on the specified set value, and ends the suggestive effect determination processing during rear variable display (153SGS307).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-22(B), a total of five patterns from pattern SS-1 to pattern SS-5 are provided as determinable effect patterns in 153SG307. Among these patterns SS-1 to SS-5, pattern SS-1 suggests the possibility that the set value is an odd number (for example, 1, 3, 5), and pattern SS-2 suggests the possibility that the set value is an even number ( For example, 2, 4, 6), pattern SS-3 suggests the possibility that the setting value is an odd-numbered intermediate setting or higher (for example, 3 or 5), pattern SS-4 indicates that the setting value may be an even intermediate setting or higher (eg, 4 or 6), and pattern SS-5 suggests that the setting value may be the highest setting (eg, 6).

Patterns SS-1 and SS-2 are determined at a high rate when the set value is any one of 1 to 4 (low setting), so that the set value is either 5 or 6 (high setting). It is assumed that the degree of expectation of being either is low, and for pattern SS-3 and pattern SS-4, when the setting value is either 5 or 6, it is determined at a high rate, so that the setting value 5, It is said that expectations for being 6 are high.

In this characteristic portion 153SG, setting values 1 to 4 are set low and setting values 5 and 6 are high, but setting values 1 to 3 may be low and setting values 4 to 6 may be high. Alternatively, setting values 1 and 2 may be set to low, setting values 3 and 4 to intermediate settings, and setting values 5 and 6 to high settings, and the performance pattern execution ratio may be set.

In the processing of 153SGS307 described above, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the effect control CPU 120 changes the effect pattern to pattern SS- at a rate of 60%, as shown in FIG. 8-24. 1, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 25%, pattern SS-3 at a rate of 9%, pattern SS-4 at a rate of 6%, pattern SS-4 at a rate of 0% Decide on SS-5. Further, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the pattern SS-1 is determined as the production pattern at a rate of 25%, the pattern SS-2 is determined at a rate of 60%, and 6 The pattern SS-3 is determined at a rate of 9%, the pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 9%, and the pattern SS-5 is determined at a rate of 0%. Further, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the production pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 50%, determined to be pattern SS-2 at a rate of 20%, and determined to be pattern SS-2 at a rate of 20%. SS-3 is determined at a rate of 10%, pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 10%, and pattern SS-5 is determined at a rate of 0%.

Further, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4, the production pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 20%, determined to be pattern SS-2 at a rate of 50%, and 10 SS-3 is determined at a rate of 10%, pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 20%, and pattern SS-5 is determined at a rate of 0%. Further, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 5, the production pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 20%, determined to be pattern SS-2 at a rate of 30%, and determined to be pattern SS-2 at a rate of 30%. SS-3 is determined at a rate of 10%, pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 20%, and pattern SS-5 is determined at a rate of 0%. Further, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the production pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 30%, determined to be pattern SS-2 at a rate of 20%, and 15 %, the pattern SS-3 is determined, the pattern SS-4 is determined at the rate of 30%, and the pattern SS-5 is determined at the rate of 5%.

As described above, in the present characteristic portion 153SG, the setting value suggestion effect is executed in pattern SS-1 or pattern SS-2, thereby suggesting that the setting value is any one of 1 to 4. It is suggested that the set value is 5 or 6 by executing the effect in pattern SS-3 or pattern SS-4. Then, when the setting suggesting effect is executed in the pattern SS-5, the setting value of 6 is confirmed.

FIG. 8-25 is a flow chart showing the suggestive effect determination process during front variable display (153SGS280) executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 8-20. 8-25, the effect control CPU 120 first specifies the variable display result of the variable display (153SGS311). Also, it is determined whether or not execution of the setting suggesting effect is determined as the suggesting effect during rear variable display (153SGS312).

When the execution of the jackpot suggestion performance is determined as the rear variable display suggestion performance, whether or not to execute the front variable display suggestion performance and the front variable display suggestion based on the execution of the jackpot suggestion performance and the result of the variable display The effect to be executed as the effect is determined from the character effect and the timer effect (153SGS313). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-26(A), when the result of the variable display is a big hit, the non-execution of the suggestion effect during the front variable display is determined at a rate of 40%, and at a rate of 30%. determines execution of a character performance as a suggestive performance during front variable display, and determines execution of a timer performance as a suggestive performance during front variable display at a rate of 30%. Also, if the result of the variable display is a failure, 70% of the decisions are made to not execute the suggestive effect during the variable front display, and 25% of the decisions are made to execute the character effect as the suggestive effect during the variable front display. Execution of the timer effect is determined at a rate of 5% as the suggestive effect during the variable display of the front part.

In other words, in the case where the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, when the variable display result is a big hit, the front variable display is performed at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a loss. Execution of suggestive performance is determined, and when the result of variable display is a big hit, execution of character performance and execution of timer performance are determined at the same rate as suggestive performance during front variable display, while variable display result. In the case of a failure, execution of the character performance is determined at a higher rate than execution of the timer performance as a suggestive performance during the front variable display. is set.

In addition, when execution of the setting suggesting effect as the suggesting effect during the rear variable display is determined, the effect control CPU 120 executes the setting suggesting effect and the suggesting effect during the front variable display based on the result of the variable display. The effect to be executed as the presence/absence and suggestive effect during front variable display is determined from the character effect and the timer effect (153SGS314). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-26(B), when the result of the variable display is a big hit, the non-execution of the suggestion effect during the front variable display is determined at a rate of 30%, and at a rate of 0%. determines the execution of the character performance as the suggestive performance during the front variable display, and determines the execution of the timer performance as the suggestive performance during the variable front display at a rate of 70%. In addition, when the result of the variable display is a failure, 80% of the decisions are made to not execute the suggestive effect during the variable front display, and 0% of the decisions are made to execute the character effect as the suggestive effect during the variable front display. Then, execution of the timer effect is determined as the suggestive effect during the front variable display at a rate of 20%.

In other words, when the execution of the set suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, if the variable display result is a big hit, the front variable display is being performed at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a loss. It is set so that the execution of the suggestive effect is determined and the execution of the character effect as the suggestive effect during the front variable display is not determined regardless of whether the result of the variable display is a big win or a loss. That is, the degree of expectation for a big hit in the timer effect is set higher than the degree of expectation for a big win in the character effect.

For this reason, when the variable display result is a big hit, execution of the timer effect is determined at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a loss, so it is suggested during the front variable display. When the timer effect is executed as the effect, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the variable display result is a big hit.

Then, as shown in FIG. 8-25, after executing 153SGS313 or 153SGS314, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the suggestive effect during front variable display is determined (153SGS315). If it is decided not to execute the suggestive effect during the variable display of the front part, the process of deciding the suggestive effect during the variable display of the front part is terminated, and if it is decided to execute the suggestive effect during the variable display of the front part, the forward part is further processed. It is determined whether or not execution of a character presentation has been decided as a suggestive presentation during variable display (153SGS316).

When it is determined to execute a character presentation as a suggestive presentation during front variable display, the presentation pattern of the character presentation is determined and stored based on the result of the variable display, and the suggestive presentation determination processing during variable front display is completed. (153 SGS317).

As the effect pattern of the character effect that can be determined in the processing of 153SGS317, as shown in FIG. 8-26(C), a total of two effect patterns of pattern CS-1 and pattern CS-2 are provided. . Of these production patterns, pattern CS-1 is a production pattern (big hit expectation: low) that suggests that the variable display result by displaying the character A (not shown) on the image display device 5 has the lowest probability of winning a big hit. Pattern CS-2 is an effect pattern suggesting that the ratio of the variable display result to a big hit by displaying a character B (not shown) on the image display device 5 is higher than pattern CS-1 (expectation for big win: medium ).

For this reason, in the processing of 153SGS317, as shown in FIG. , and 80% of the time, pattern CS-2 is determined. On the other hand, if the variable display result is a failure, the effect pattern of the character effect is determined to be the pattern CS-1 at a rate of 80% and the pattern CS-2 at a rate of 20%.

Further, when execution of the timer effect is determined as the suggestive effect during the front variable display, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect pattern of the timer effect based on the effect determined to be executed as the suggestive effect during the rear variable display. is determined and stored, and the suggestive effect determination process during variable part display is terminated (153SGS318).

As the effect pattern of the timer effect that can be determined in the process of 153SGS318, as shown in FIG. 8-26(C), a total of two effect patterns, pattern TS-1 and pattern TS-2, are provided. Of these effect patterns, pattern TS-1 suggests that the percentage of the variable display results that result in a big win on the image display device 5 is higher than pattern CS-1 and pattern CS-2 of character effects (expectation for big win: high). ) together with the pattern TS-2 indicates the period until the start of execution of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display, together with the image of the character X, for 25 seconds. is higher than the pattern CS-1 and pattern CS-2 of the character production (big hit expectation: high), and the period until the execution of the rear variable display suggestive production is started for 25 seconds with the image of the character Y. (See Figures 8-27(C), 8-29(D) and 8-29(E)).

Therefore, in the processing of 153SGS318, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. The pattern is determined to be pattern TS-1 80% of the time, and pattern TS-2 20% of the time. In addition, when the suggestive effect during rear variable display whose execution has been determined is the set suggestive effect, the effect control CPU 120 determines the pattern TS-1 at a rate of 80%, and the pattern TS-1 at a rate of 20%. Decide on 2.

That is, when the timer effect is executed as the suggestive effect during the front variable display, the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-2 rather than the pattern TS-1 (that is, the timer In the case where the performance period of the performance is long and the character B is displayed on the image display device 5 rather than the character A, the ratio of executing the set suggestive performance as the suggestive performance during the rear variable display is set higher. Therefore, in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect period of the timer effect and the character displayed on the image display device 5 . Further, when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-2, the player can expect the setting suggesting effect to be executed more than when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-1. It is possible to improve the game interest.

As described above, in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. The expectation of a big hit is set higher than when the character production is executed as a suggestion, and the suggestion production is set as a suggestion production during the rear variable display at a higher rate than when the character production is executed as a suggestion production during the front variable display. A production is to be executed.

As shown in FIGS. 8-20 to 8-28, when it is determined to execute the suggestive effect during variable display during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 determines in the effect process during variable display (S172). Process data corresponding to the effect pattern of the suggestive effect during front variable display may be set, and the effect device may be controlled according to the content of the process data corresponding to the process timer in the subsequent effect process during variable display (S172). Further, when it is determined to execute the suggestive effect during the rear variable display during the variable display, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the timer for waiting for the start of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display by 1 each time the effect processing during the variable display is executed. Then, based on the value of the waiting timer for starting the suggestive performance during the rear variable display becoming 0, the process data corresponding to the performance pattern of the determined suggestive performance during the variable rear display is set. Then, the effect device may be controlled according to the content of the process data according to the process timer in the effect process during variable display (S172).

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 8-28 (A) and 8-28 (B), the jackpot suggesting effect and setting suggesting effect as the suggesting effect during the rear variable display in this characteristic part 153SG are during the execution period of the ready-to-win effect. It is executed for 7 seconds, which is a longer period than the special figure fluctuation time of the non-reach fluctuation pattern (see FIG. 8-6). Therefore, even if the player takes his/her eyes off the image display device 5 for a moment, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the big win suggesting effect or the setting suggesting effect.

Next, an effect mode during variable display in the characteristic portion 153SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-29 to 8-31. First, as shown in FIGS. 8-29 (A) and 8-29 (B), a new starting prize is generated during the variable display, and based on the starting prize, the reserved memory display is displayed as a pre-reading notice effect. When the display pattern γ or the display pattern δ is determined, a new reserved memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera in the first reserved memory display area 153SG005D or the second reserved memory display area 153SG005U. .

Then, as shown in FIGS. 8-29(C) to 8-29(E), when the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display, which is the aspect of the camera, is started as a new variable display, the front part A timer effect is started as a suggestive effect during variable display. At this time, when the effect pattern of the timer effect is pattern TS-1, as shown in FIG. Renewal display of a timer for 25 seconds, which is a period up to the suggestive effect during variable display, is started. Further, when the effect pattern of the timer effect is pattern TS-2, as shown in FIG. An update display of a timer for 30 seconds, which is a period up to the suggestion effect during display, is started.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 8-30(F) to 8-30(H), when the variable display progresses with the timer update display until the suggestive effect during the rear variable display, the super ready-to-win effect is started. Then, when the timer reaches 0 seconds (timer performance ends) during execution of the super ready-to-win performance, a big win suggesting performance or a setting suggesting performance is started as a suggesting performance during the rear variable display.

Specifically, when execution of a jackpot suggestive effect is determined as the suggestive effect during rear variable display, if the determined effect pattern is pattern AS-1, as shown in FIG. 8-30 (I) In the image display device 5, a message such as "chance!" indicating that the expectation of a big hit is low is displayed, and if the determined effect pattern is pattern AS-2, it is shown in FIG. 8-30 (J). 8 is displayed on the image display device 5 to the effect that the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher than that of the pattern AS-1, and the effect pattern that has been determined is the pattern AS-3. As indicated by -30(K), a message indicating that the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher than that of pattern AS-2, such as "Extremely Hot!", is displayed on the image display device 5. FIG.

On the other hand, when execution of the setting suggesting effect is determined as the suggesting effect during rear variable display, as shown in FIGS. In the case of patterns SS-1 to SS-4, setting value suggestion images 153SG005H, 153SG005I, 153SG005J, and 153SG005K of different characters are displayed on the image display device 5, respectively, so that they are set in the pachinko machine 1. settings are suggested. Further, when the effect pattern of the setting value suggesting effect is the pattern SS-5, the setting value suggesting image 153SGS005L, which is a collection of all the characters displayed on the image display device 5 in the patterns SS-1 to SS-4, is displayed on the image display device. 5.

As described above, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, when the reserved memory display is displayed as a pre-reading notice in the form of a blue or red camera, when the pre-reading notice is not executed or the reserved memory display The setting suggestion effect is executed at a higher rate than when is displayed as a white square or star. Therefore, the player anticipates that the setting suggestion effect will be executed in advance at the stage when the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera, and uses the mobile terminal such as a smartphone possessed by the player to suggest setting. It is now possible to make preparations for filming the production. In other words, the pending memory display in the mode of the blue or red camera in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment is also an effect prompting the player to prepare for photographing the setting suggestion effect.

As described above, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, it is possible to execute a character effect and a timer effect in which the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher than the character effect as a suggestive effect during the front variable display indicating the degree of expectation for a big win. As shown in -26 (D), when the timer effect is executed during the variable display, the suggested effect is set as the suggested effect during the rear variable display at a higher rate than when the character effect is executed during the variable display. executed. That is, when the timer effect is executed, the degree of expectation for the big win is higher than when the character effect is executed. The setting suggestion performance is executed in a state where the player is paying attention, and the player can be prevented from overlooking the setting suggestion performance.

In addition, as the suggestive effect during the front variable display during the variable display, in addition to the character effect, it is possible to execute a timer effect that suggests the period until the start of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display. The player can easily recognize the execution start timing of the setting suggesting effect by the execution.

In addition, in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, as a timer effect, a numerical value is displayed for the period until the execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is started (see FIGS. 8-29 (D) and 8-29 (E)). Although a form of notifying more clearly is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a timer effect, for example, by performing an increase/decrease display of a gauge, meter, etc., the rear variable display suggests The period until the start of execution of the effect may not be clearly notified (only an approximate period may be suggested).

Furthermore, in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image display on the image display device 5, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the light emission of the game effect lamp 9, and the display means other than the image display device 5 Any one of the displays in , or a combination of a plurality of aspects may be executed.

Further, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-30(H) and 8-31(L), the timer displayed on the image display device 5 as a timer effect is set to 0. Based on this, there is a case where a big hit suggesting effect is executed in addition to the setting suggesting effect as the suggesting effect during the rear variable display. In other words, even when the timer performance is executed, the big hit suggestion performance may be executed instead of the setting suggestion performance, so that the unexpectedness can be produced and the game interest can be improved.

In addition, in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, based on the fact that the timer displayed on the image display device 5 has become 0 as the timer effect, the setting suggesting effect and the big hit suggesting effect as the suggesting effect during the rear variable display are performed. Although only one of them can be executed as an example, the present invention is not limited to this. , both the setting suggesting performance and the big hit suggesting performance may be executed as the suggesting performance during the rear variable display.

Furthermore, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, when the timer effect is executed as the suggestive effect during the front variable display, the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is always executed. The present invention is not limited to this, and a case may be provided in which the suggesting effect during the rear variable display is not executed even if the timer effect is executed as the suggestive effect during the front variable display.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 8-27(B) and 8-27(C), as the effect patterns of the timer effect, a pattern TS-1 with a effect period of 25 seconds and a pattern with a effect period of 30 seconds TS-2 is provided, and when the timer performance is executed with the pattern TS-2, the setting suggestion performance is executed at a higher rate than when the timer performance is executed with the pattern TS-1. In other words, when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-2, it is suggested that the setting suggestion effect is executed over a longer period of time than when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-1. It is possible to further prevent the player from overlooking the setting suggestion performance.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-28, the suggestion effect during the rear variable display including the setting suggestion effect is executed during the ready-to-win effect period, which is the latter half of the variable display of super reach, so that the setting suggestion effect by the player is executed. can be further prevented from being overlooked.

In addition, in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, a mode in which the setting suggestion effect is executed during the reach effect period, which is the second half of the variable display of super reach, is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, a case may be provided in which the setting suggestion effect is executed in the first half of the super reach variable display.

Further, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-18 and FIG. In the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display (the value of the pending display flag is 3 or 4), which is the mode of the camera in which the pending display notice effect that can be displayed in the mode or the like can be executed, and the display mode is a blue or red camera mode, It is possible to determine the execution of the setting suggestion effect at a higher rate than the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display (the value of the pending display flag is 1 or 2) whose display mode is a white square or star. Therefore, in the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display (the value of the pending display flag is 3 or 4), which is the mode of the blue or red camera, the player can decide whether the variable display result will be a big hit or not. Since the setting-suggestion performance is executed when the player is paying attention, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the setting-suggestion performance.

Further, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-29 and 8-31, when the pending display notice effect is executed, it corresponds to the pending memory display which is the target of the pending display notice effect. It is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect in the variable display (variable display immediately after the pending display notice effect is ended). Therefore, since the setting suggesting effect is executed when the player is paying attention to the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display which is the object of the pending display notice effect, the player is less likely to miss the setting suggesting effect. more can be prevented.

In addition, in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, a mode in which a pending display notice effect can be executed as a pre-reading notice was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. An effect other than the effect may be made executable, and it may be suggested that the setting suggestion effect is executed as the effect mode of the effect.

Furthermore, in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, the setting suggesting effect can be executed in the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display (the variable display immediately after the pending display previous notice effect is terminated) that is the target of the pending display previous notice effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and during the execution period of the pending display notice effect The setting suggestion effect may be executed from the previous timing).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-19, the ratio of displaying the pending memory display in the form of a blue or red camera as the pre-reading notice effect is changed to the white square or star shape as the pre-reading notice effect. Since the display ratio is set lower than the display ratio, the reserved memory display is displayed in a blue or red camera mode, so that the reserved memory display is displayed in a white square or star shape. It is possible to attract the attention of the operator and further prevent the operator from overlooking the setting suggestion effect.

Further, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, the ratio of displaying the reserved memory display as the pre-reading notice effect in the form of a blue or red camera is set as the pre-reading notice effect by displaying the reserved memory display in a white square or star shape. , but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera as a pre-reading preview effect. The ratio may be set higher than the ratio of displaying the pending memory display with a white square or star as a pre-reading notice effect, or the pending memory display may be displayed with a blue or red camera as a pre-reading notice effect. The ratio of displaying in the mode and the ratio of displaying the reserved memory display as a white square or star as the pre-reading advance notice effect may be the same.

In addition, in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, by displaying the pending memory display in the mode of a blue or red camera as the pending display notice effect, the player is prepared to shoot the setting suggestion effect. Since the player can prepare a form terminal such as a smart phone before starting the setting suggesting effect, the success rate of photographing the setting suggesting effect by the player can be increased.

It should be noted that in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, as the pending display notice effect, the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera, so that the player is prepared to shoot the setting suggestion effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera as a pending display notice effect, the speaker 8L, 8R Alternatively, the player may be separately prompted to prepare for photographing the setting suggesting effect by outputting a sound or displaying a message image on the image display device 5 .

Further, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, the display pattern γ for displaying the pending memory display in the form of a blue camera and the display pattern δ for displaying the pending memory display in the form of a red camera are used to perform the pending display forewarning effect. It can be executed, and as shown in FIG. The ratio of execution of the setting suggestion effect is different between the case of display in the camera mode (the value of the pending display flag is 4). In particular, when the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a red camera, setting suggestion effects are executed at a higher rate than when the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue camera. When the display is displayed in the form of a red camera, the player is more focused on whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed than in the case where the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue camera. It is possible to improve the game interest.

In addition, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, when the pending memory display is displayed in a blue or red camera mode, the pending memory display is displayed until the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display starts. Although the form in which the form does not change has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and a case may be provided in which the display form of the pending memory display changes from the blue camera form to the red camera form. Further, a case is provided in which the pending memory display corresponding to the variable display being executed is continuously displayed as the active display, and the display mode of the active display changes from the blue camera mode to the red camera mode. may By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the setting suggestion effect will be executed until the variable display is finished, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-20, the suggestive effect during the rear variable display including the setting suggestive effect is only in the variable display of the super reach variation pattern with the long special figure variation time. It is executable, and it is not executed in the variable display of the normal reach or non-reach fluctuation pattern with a short special figure fluctuation time, so the execution of the setting suggestion effect during the short variable display period is suppressed, and the game is played. It is possible to prevent the user from overlooking the setting suggestion effect.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 8-6 and 8-28, the execution period of the setting suggestion production is set to 7 seconds longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the shortened non-reach fluctuation pattern, so the super reach variable It is possible to further prevent the player from overlooking the setting suggestion effect during the display (during execution of the ready-to-win effect).

Also, as shown in FIG. 8-19, when the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera, the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display is super reach capable of executing the setting suggestion effect. Since the variable display is suggested, the reserved memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera, thereby making the player pay attention to whether or not the setting suggesting effect is executed, thereby increasing the interest in the game. can be improved.

Also, as shown in FIG. 8-19, if the variation category is non-reach or other (normal reach or small hit), that is, if it is determined that the special figure variation time is shorter than the super reach, the pending display Since the pending memory display is not displayed in the blue or red camera mode as the advance notice effect, the player's attention is not focused on the pending memory display being displayed in the blue or red camera mode. In spite of this, it is possible to prevent the setting suggesting effect from being executed and the interest to be lowered due to the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory display being the variable display of non-reach, normal reach, or the like.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 8-20 to 8-28, during the variable display of super reach, it is possible to execute the suggestive effect during the front variable display including the timer effect, but it is more special than the variable display of super reach. Since the timer effect is not executed during the variable display of non-reach and normal reach with short fluctuation time, the suggestion effect during the rear variable display including the setting suggestion effect is not executed Timer effect during the variable display of non-reach and normal reach It is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconsistency in the performance due to the execution of

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention may be modified or added without departing from the spirit of the present invention. include.

For example, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. The expectation of a big hit is set higher than when the character production is executed, and the suggestion production is set as the suggestion production during the rear variable display at a higher rate than when the character production is executed as the suggestion production during the front variable display. is set to be executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. is set lower than the ratio for determining the execution of the character effect as the suggestive effect during the front variable display, and when the timer effect is executed as the suggestive effect during the variable front display, the variable front part It may be set so that the set suggestive effect is executed as the suggestive effect during rear variable display at a higher rate than the case where the character effect is executed as the suggestive effect during display.

Further, in the characterizing part 153SG of the above-described embodiment, as a pre-reading notice, the reserved memory display is displayed as a white square, a star, or a blue 8-33 (A) and As shown in FIG. 8-33(B), when the reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 153SG005D or the second reserved memory display area 153SG005U, the image display device 5 displays the first reserved memory display area 153SG005D. When the predetermined effect image 153SG005E overlaps the second reserved memory display area 153SG005U, at least the reserved memory display in the mode of the blue or red camera is displayed preferentially over the effect image 153SG005E (the blue or red camera The reserved memory display in the form of (1) may be displayed so as not to be hidden by the effect image 153SG005E). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the reserved memory display in the form of the blue or red camera due to the reserved memory display in the form of the blue or red camera being blocked by the effect image 153SG005E. be able to.

Further, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the above embodiment, a configuration was exemplified in which the setting suggestion effect can be executed for 7 seconds only during the variable display of super reach, but the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in FIGS. 8-34(A) and 8-34(B), as a modified example 153SG-3, it is possible to execute a setting suggesting effect for 7 seconds during variable display of normal reach and non-shortening non-reach. good too. Furthermore, during the variable display of the shortened non-reach, a period dedicated to the variable display of the shortened non-reach (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-34 (C), it is a special variable time of the variable display of the shortened non-reach 3 seconds (shorter than 3.75 seconds to 5.75 seconds) may be executed.

Further, in the characteristic part 153SG of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 153SG-4, the pending memory display is a blue camera mode The determination ratio of at least one effect pattern in the setting suggesting effect may be different between the case of displaying in and the case of displaying in the mode of the red camera. By doing so, the player can be made to pay attention to which of the mode of the blue camera or the mode of the red camera the suspension storage display is displayed as the suspension display advance notice effect, so that the game interest can be improved.

Further, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the above-described embodiment, two timings (25 seconds and 30 seconds after the start of variable display) are provided as the start timing of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display during the variable display of super reach. Although the setting suggesting effect is more likely to be executed as the rear variable display suggesting effect by executing the rear variable display suggesting effect from the timing, the present invention is not limited to this, and the modification 153SG- As 5, when the setting suggestion effect start timing is 30 seconds after the start of the variable display, the setting suggestion effect is patterned at a higher rate than when the setting suggestion effect start timing is 25 seconds after the variable display start. SS-3 to pattern SS-5, etc., may be performed with effect patterns suggesting high set values. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the timing at which the setting suggestion effect is executed, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the above-described embodiment, the setting suggesting effect is executed according to the effect executed as the suggesting effect during the front variable display and the display mode of the pending memory display displayed as the pending display forewarning effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect that is executed as a suggestive effect during the front variable display and the effect that is displayed as a pending display notice effect It may be suggested whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed by only one of the display mode of the pending memory display. Further, in the characterizing part 153SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode is illustrated in which the set suggestive effect can be executed as the suggestive effect during the rear variable display during the variable display in which the timer effect as the suggestive effect during the front variable display is executed. , The present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display result of the variable display that executes the timer effect is a big hit, a setting suggestion effect is performed during the big win game (advantageous state in the present invention) based on the variable display. may be executed.

Further, in the characterizing part 153SG of the above-described embodiment, when the suspension display forewarning effect has already been executed, the execution of the new suspension display forewarning effect is restricted, but the present invention is limited to this. However, if the pending display forewarning effect has already been executed, only the execution of the new pending display foretelling effect in a part of the display patterns may be restricted. For example, when the pending display notice effect is already executed in the display pattern γ or the display pattern δ (when the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera), a new pending display notice effect is executed. It restricts only what is executed in the display pattern α and the display pattern β (that the pending memory display is displayed as a white square or star). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming difficult to understand due to the simultaneous execution of a plurality of pending display forewarning effects with different suggested contents. Further, when the pending display forewarning effect is already executed by the display pattern γ or the display pattern δ, the execution of the new pending display forewarning effect by the display pattern α or the display pattern β is restricted. , the player can be made to pay more attention to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed. Also, if the pending display notice effect has already been executed in display pattern α or display pattern β (when the pending memory display is displayed as a white square or star), a new pending display notice effect By limiting only what is executed in the display pattern γ and the display pattern δ (that the pending memory display is displayed in a blue or red camera mode), it is possible to determine whether the variable display result will be a big hit or not. It is possible to make the player pay more attention.

In addition, in the characterizing part 153SG of the above-described embodiment, a form in which the holding display notice effect can be executed as the prefetch effect in the present invention is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the prefetch effect Alternatively, an effect other than the pending display notice effect may be executable if it is an effect that can be executed from the timing before the target variable display starts.

Further, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the above-described embodiment, a form in which a character effect and a timer effect can be executed as an indication effect during the front variable display indicating that the variable display result will be a big hit was exemplified. The present invention is not limited to this, and as the suggesting effect during the front part variable display, any effect other than the character effect or the timer effect may be executed as long as it is a effect suggesting that the result of the variable display will be a big hit.

[Main Configuration and Effect of Characteristic Portion 153SG]
Conventionally, it is possible to set one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player, and to execute an effect that suggests which set value is set (setting suggestion effect). (for example, JP-A-2010-200902). However, in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902, the player may miss the setting suggestion effect because it is difficult to understand the trigger for suggesting the setting value by the setting effect. The characteristic part 153SG is made by paying attention to such a problem, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing the player from overlooking the setting suggestion effect. The main configuration and effects of such characteristic portion 153SG will be described. Characteristic portion 153SG has the following configuration and effects.

The gaming machine described in means 1 is
It is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, a big win game state) advantageous to the player, and to set one of a plurality of set values (for example, 1 to 6) with different degrees of advantage for the player. A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1),
Advantageous state suggesting effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120 capable of executing an advantageous state suggesting effect (for example, suggesting effect during front variable display) suggesting that the control is to be in the advantageous state (for example, variable display shown in FIG. 7) The part that executes the middle production process),
Setting suggesting effect executing means (for example, effect control CPU 120 during variable display shown in FIG. 7) capable of executing setting suggesting effect for suggesting setting of set value (for example, setting suggesting effect as suggesting effect during rear variable display) The part that executes the production process) and
with
The advantageous state suggesting effect executing means sets the advantageous state suggesting effect to a first mode (for example, a character effect as a suggesting effect during the variable display of the front part), and the rate of control to the advantageous state is higher than that of the first mode. Can be executed in a second mode (for example, a timer effect as a suggestive effect during front variable display),
The setting suggesting effect executing means has a higher ratio of the setting suggesting effect when the advantageous state suggesting effect is executed in the second mode than when the advantageous state suggesting effect is executed in the first mode. can be executed after the execution of the advantageous state suggestive effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-26, when executing a timer effect as a suggestive effect during the front variable display, a character It is characterized by the fact that the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a higher rate than the case of executing the effect).
According to this feature, the setting suggesting effect is executed when the player is paying attention to the subsequent development by executing the second mode in which the ratio of control to a relatively advantageous state is relatively high as the advantageous state suggesting effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the setting suggestion effect.

The gaming machine of means 2 is the gaming machine according to means 1,
A display means capable of displaying (for example, an image display device 5) is provided,
The advantageous state suggesting effect executing means performs the setting suggesting effect as the advantageous state suggesting effect of the second mode by displaying the period information on the display means and then updating and displaying the period information in a specific mode. It is characterized by being able to execute a period suggestion effect (for example, a timer effect) that suggests a period until.
According to this feature, the player can easily recognize the execution timing of the setting suggesting effect by executing the period suggesting effect.

The gaming machine of means 3 is the gaming machine according to means 2,
The setting suggesting effect executing means is capable of executing at least one of a special suggesting effect suggesting control to the advantageous state based on the fact that the period information becomes the specific mode, and the setting suggesting effect. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 8-30 and 8-31, a part where a big hit suggesting effect or a setting suggesting effect is executed based on the timer reaching 0).
According to this feature, when the period suggestive effect is executed, not only the setting suggestive effect but also the special suggestive effect may be executed.

The gaming machine of means 4 is the gaming machine according to means 2 or 3,
The advantageous state suggesting effect executing means can execute the period suggesting effect over a first period (e.g., 25 seconds) or a second period (e.g., 30 seconds) that is longer than the first period. ,
The setting-suggestion effect executing means, when the update display of the numerical information is executed over the second period, is performed at a higher rate than when the update display of the numerical information is executed over the first period. The setting suggestion effect can be executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-27, when the timer effect is executed for 30 seconds, the timer effect is higher than when the timer effect is executed for 25 seconds. It is characterized by the part where the setting suggestion effect is executed at a rate).
According to this feature, when the period-suggesting effect is executed over the second period, setting suggestions to the player are made over a longer period of time than when the period-suggesting effect is executed over the first period. Since it is suggested that the performance will be executed, it is possible to further prevent the player from overlooking the setting suggestion performance.

The gaming machine of means 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
A gaming machine capable of performing variable display (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol variation process shown in FIG. 5, and the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display process shown in FIG. 7 ),
The setting suggestion effect executing means can execute the setting suggestion effect in response to the execution period of the variable display becoming a specific period corresponding to a specific timing in the second half period of the variable display (for example, FIG. 8- As shown in 28, the effect control CPU 120 reaches the timing (25 seconds or 30 seconds after the start of the variable display) at which the timer effect ends during the execution period of the reach effect during the variable display of the super reach. It is characterized by a part that can execute setting suggestion production depending on the situation).
According to this feature, since the setting suggestion effect is executed in the second half period of the variable display, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the setting suggestion effect.

The gaming machine of means 6 is
It is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, a big win game state) advantageous to the player, and to set one of a plurality of set values (for example, 1 to 6) with different degrees of advantage for the player. A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1),
Advantageous state suggesting effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120 capable of executing an advantageous state suggesting effect (for example, suggesting effect during front variable display) suggesting that the control is to be in the advantageous state (for example, variable display shown in FIG. 7) The part that executes the middle production process),
Setting suggesting effect executing means (for example, effect control CPU 120 during variable display shown in FIG. 7) capable of executing setting suggesting effect for suggesting setting of set value (for example, setting suggesting effect as suggesting effect during rear variable display) The part that executes the production process) and
with
The advantageous state suggesting effect executing means can execute the advantageous state suggesting effect in a first mode and a second mode with a lower execution rate than the first mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-32, A part where the effect control CPU 120 can execute the suggestive effect during the front variable display from the character effect and the timer effect whose execution rate is lower than the character effect),
The setting suggesting effect executing means has a higher ratio of the setting suggesting effect when the advantageous state suggesting effect is executed in the second mode than when the advantageous state suggesting effect is executed in the first mode. can be executed after the execution of the advantageous state suggestive effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-26, when executing a timer effect as a suggestive effect during the front variable display, a character It is characterized by the fact that the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a higher rate than the case of executing the effect).
According to this feature, since the advantageous state suggesting effect is executed in the second mode, the set suggesting effect is executed when the player is paying attention to the advantageous state suggesting effect of the second mode. It is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the setting suggestion performance.

In addition, the present invention may have only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may include the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention as well as the matters specifying the invention other than the matters specifying the invention. It can be anything.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 131F)
Next, the gaming machine in the characterizing portion 131F of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-1 to 9-3.

The characteristic portion 131F is characterized by the arrangement of various structures arranged in the game area where game balls as game media provided on the game board 2 flow down. The game area consists of a left game area corresponding to the left side of the game board 2 where game balls hit relatively weakly (left-handed) by operating the ball-hitting operation handle 30 flow down, and a left game area by operating the ball-hitting operation handle 30. A right game area is provided in which a game ball hit (right-handed) stronger than the falling game ball passes through the upper path of the image display device 5 and flows down.

A general winning hole 10 and a winning ball device 6A are provided in the left area. On the other hand, the right side area is provided with a passage gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7, and a normal pattern operating port 50 from the upstream side to the downstream side. At the bottom of the game area, there is provided an out-opening 51 as a discharge area for discharging the game balls that did not win the prize-winning holes or the winning ball device to the outside of the game area. The ejection area is an area where no prize balls are awarded even if game balls enter.

A game ball flowing down the left game area can enter a first start winning hole formed by the general winning hole 10 and the winning ball device 6A. In addition, the game ball flowing down the right game area is the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and the working opening formed by the normal drawing working opening 50. It is possible to win a prize, and it is possible to pass through (enter) the passage gate 41 . Here, when the game ball enters (wins) the normal pattern operation opening 50 (normal pattern start opening), or when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 (when it enters), the normal pattern is variable display The Pudo game is executed. In addition, when a game ball enters (wins a prize) in the normal pattern operation port 50, there is a payout of one game ball. In addition, there is no payout due to passage of the game ball through the passage gate 41 .

As shown in FIG. 9-1, a plurality of obstacle nails 52 are provided between the winning ball device 6A provided in the left region and the normal drawing operation opening 50 and the special variable winning ball device 7 provided in the right region. are arranged. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left area cannot enter the normal figure operation port 50 or the special variable winning ball device 7, and the game ball flowing down the right side area cannot enter the winning ball device 6A. there is Also, only a portion of the obstructing nail 52 is shown.

Due to the arrangement of the obstruction nail 52, the game ball flowing down the right side area by striking to the right wins the second starting winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the big winning hole formed by the special variable winning ball device 7. Even if not, most of them enter the normal drawing operation port 50. In other words, a game ball that does not enter the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B or the big winning hole formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 by hitting to the right is discharged through the out hole 51 (out hole 51) will enter the normal pattern operation port 50 at a higher rate than that. In addition, due to the arrangement of the obstruction nail 52, the percentage of game balls that pass through the passage gate 41 in the case of hitting to the right is higher than that of entering the normal figure operation opening 50. - 特許庁

[Regarding the payout of game balls]
Here, the payout of game balls will be described. The CPU 103 detects a game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6A, and passes (enters) the second starting winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B. ), a count switch 23 that detects a game ball that has passed through (entered) the big winning hole formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and has passed through (entered) the general winning hole 10. In response to the winning detection based on the fact that either the general count switch that detects the game ball that has passed through the normal pattern operation port 50 or the normal pattern operation port switch that detects the game ball that has passed (entered) the normal pattern operation port 50 is turned on, the number of prize balls is counted. A payout control command (a prize ball number signal) shown is output to a payout control board (not shown). The payout control board is equipped with a payout control microcomputer, drives a ball payout device (not shown) in response to payout control commands, and controls payout of prize balls.

In the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic part 131F, when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6A, three game balls are paid out, and the variable winning ball device 6B forms. When a game ball enters the second start winning hole, one game ball is put out, and when a game ball enters the big winning hole formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, 12 game balls. is put out, three game balls are put out when the game balls enter the general prize winning opening 10, and one game ball is put out when the game balls enter the normal figure operation opening 50.例文帳に追加

[About game status]
The characteristic part 131F includes at least a low-probability-low base state as a normal state, a low-probability-high base state as a time-saving state, a high-probability-high base state as a variable-probability state, and a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player. be The gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled by the CPU 103 . In the high base state, the probability of becoming a "normal hit" in the normal game is improved compared to the normal state. Therefore, by hitting the right in the high base state, the game ball enters the passage gate 41 provided in the right side area or the normal figure operation opening 50, and the variable winning ball device 6 changes from the closed state to the open state. higher than normal. That is, in the high base state, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B than in the normal state.

[About right-handed]
When hitting to the right in the high base state, the game ball enters the passing gate 41 above the right side area, or the game ball flows down without entering the passing gate 41. - 特許庁In addition, in the high base state, the ratio of hitting the normal pattern is higher than in the normal state, so when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the variable winning ball device 6B provided directly under the passage gate 41 has a high ratio. is opened from the closed state to the open state. Therefore, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in the high base state, the rate of the game ball entering the variable winning ball device 6B immediately below is higher than in the normal state. When the game ball enters the passage gate 41, when it is out of line or when it spills out of the variable winning ball device 6B in the open state, the game ball does not enter the variable winning ball device 6B and goes downward. flow down When a game ball enters the variable winning ball device 6B (when there is a winning to the second starting port), there is one payout of the same number as the entered number.

A game ball that does not enter the variable winning ball device 6B enters a big winning hole formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 if the special variable winning ball device 7 is in an open state. If the special variable winning ball device 7 is in a closed state, the game ball further flows downward. Due to the arrangement of the obstacle nail 52, most of the game balls that have flowed down enter the normal pattern operation opening 50. - 特許庁When entering the normal pattern operation port 50, there is one payout of the same number as the number entered. The game ball that did not enter the normal pattern operation port 50 reaches (enters) the out port 51 provided at the bottom of the right side region and is discharged out of the game region.

Due to such a structure arrangement relationship, in the jackpot game state, even if the game ball does not enter the variable winning ball device 6B, the ratio of winning the big winning hole formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is high. And, even when the game ball does not enter the big winning hole, the rate of entering the normal pattern operation hole 50 is higher than the rate of entering the out hole 51.例文帳に追加Therefore, even when the game ball does not enter the special variable winning ball device 7, it is possible to reduce the loss of the ball when it does not enter the special variable winning ball device 7.例文帳に追加

In addition, when the game ball enters the passage gate 41 or when the game ball enters the normal pattern operation port 50, the normal symbol variable display is executed. Then, from the upstream side, there is a relationship between the passage gate 41, the variable winning ball device 6B, and the normal pattern operation port 50. Therefore, even if the game ball does not enter the variable winning ball device 6B in the high base state, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened by entering the normal figure operation opening 50 than in the normal state. Therefore, even if it is difficult for the game ball to enter the passage gate 41 due to the positional relationship of the obstacle nail 52, the frequency of the game ball entering the variable winning ball device 6B can be prevented from being lowered.

In addition, the game ball that has flowed down to the right side area in the high base state has a higher rate of entering the normal figure operation opening 50 than the rate of entering the variable winning ball device 6B due to the positional relationship of the obstacle nail 52 . In this way, while preventing the rate of entering the variable winning ball device 6B from being too high during the high base state, even if the game ball does not enter the variable winning ball device 6B, the player will be Unfavorable situations can be mitigated.

[Regarding normal map process]
FIG. 9-2 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in S26 shown in FIG. 4 as the normal symbol process process. In this normal symbol process processing, the CPU 103 first executes a normal symbol start winning determination process (131FS001).

After executing the normal symbol start winning process, the CPU 103 sets the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting portion as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the RAM 102. Depending on the value, one of the processes 131FS100 to 131FS106 is selected and executed.

In the normal symbol start winning process of 131FS001, as shown in FIG. 9-3, the CPU 103 first determines whether the gate switch 21 is on based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 provided in the passage gate 41. (131FS111). If the gate switch 21 is on (131FS111; Y), the normal pattern reservation storage unit provided in the RAM 102 is referred to, and the normal pattern reservation storage number is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number). ) (131FS112). When the normal pattern reserved memory number is not the upper limit value (131FS112; N), a gate passing flag indicating that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 is set and the process proceeds to 131FS117 (131FS113).

When the gate switch 21 is off at 131FS111 (131FS111; N) or when the normal pattern hold storage number is the upper limit value at 131FS112 (131FS112), it is determined whether the normal pattern operation port switch is on. (131FS114). If the normal pattern operation port switch is on (131FS114; Y), the normal pattern reservation memory number is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) by referring to the normal pattern reservation storage unit. It is determined whether or not there is (131FS115). When the normal pattern reserved memory number is not the upper limit value (131FS115; N), set the normal pattern operation opening prize flag indicating that the game ball has won the normal pattern operation opening and proceed to 131FS117 (131FS116).

In addition, when the normal pattern operation port switch is off (131FS114; N) or when the normal pattern reservation storage number is the upper limit value (131FS115; Y), the normal pattern start winning process is terminated.

In 131FS117, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for judging the result of the normal figure display from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 or the random counter of the game control counter setting unit provided in the RAM 102. (131FS117). The numerical data extracted in this way is stored by being set at the head of the empty entry in the normal figure reservation storage unit as reservation information (131FS118).

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the normal pattern operation opening prize flag is set (131FS119). If the normal pattern operation opening winning flag is set (131FS119; Y), clear the normal pattern operation opening winning flag (131FS120), and the number of prize balls notification command according to the winning to the normal pattern starting winning prize opening , and the normal symbol start winning process is terminated (131FS121).

In addition, when the normal pattern starting prize flag is not set (131FS119; N), it is further determined whether or not the gate passage flag is set (131FS122). When the gate passage flag is not set (131FS122; N), the normal symbol start winning process is terminated, and when the gate passage flag is set (131FS122; Y), the gate passage flag is cleared ( 131FS123), the transmission setting of the gate passage notification command is performed, and the normal symbol start winning process is terminated (131FS124).

In addition, the notification command of the number of winning balls set to be transmitted in the process of 131FS121 and the notification command of gate passage set to be transmitted in the process of 131FS124 are sent to the effect control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process (see FIG. 4). output (sent) to As described above, in the normal symbol start winning process in the present embodiment, different commands are transmitted to the effect control board 12 depending on whether the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41 or entered the normal symbol operation opening. It has become.

As shown in FIG. 9-1, the normal design normal process of S131FS100 is executed when the value of the normal pattern process flag is "0". In this normal design normal process, whether or not to start the normal design game by the normal design display 20 is determined based on the presence or absence of the reserved data stored in the normal design reservation storage unit. In addition, in the normal symbol normal processing, based on the numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result, whether or not the variable display result of the normal symbol is a "hit" is derived and displayed. decide (pre-determine) before Furthermore, in the normal symbol normal processing, a fixed normal symbol (either a winning symbol or a losing symbol) in the normal symbol display device 20 in the normal symbol display 20 is set corresponding to the variable display result of the normal symbol in the normal symbol game. . In the normal design normal process, when the variable display result of the normal design is determined in advance, the value of the normal pattern process flag is updated to "1".

The normal symbol variation pattern setting process of 131FS101 is executed when the value of the normal pattern process flag is "1". This normal symbol variation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of a plurality of normal symbol variation patterns based on whether the game state is a time saving state or the like. When the normal symbol variation pattern setting process is executed and the normal symbol variation display is started, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to "2". For example, in the present embodiment, if the game state is a time-saving state (high-probability-high base state or low-probability-high base state), the normal symbol variation pattern (normal symbol variation time) is determined to 1 second, and the game If the state is a non-time-saving state (low-probability-low base state or high-probability-low base state), the normal pattern variation pattern (normal pattern fluctuation time) should be determined for a period longer than the time-saving state, such as 3 minutes. .

The normal symbol variation process of 131FS102 is executed when the value of the normal pattern process flag is "2". This normal design variation processing includes processing for setting for varying the normal design in the normal design display device 20, processing for measuring the elapsed time after the normal design starts to vary, and the like. . In addition, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the normal pattern fluctuation time corresponding to the normal pattern fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the normal pattern fluctuation reaches the normal pattern fluctuation time, the value of the normal pattern process flag is updated to "3".

The normal design stop processing of 131FS103 is executed when the value of the normal pattern process flag is "3". This normal design stop processing includes a setting process for stopping the fluctuation of the normal design on the normal design display device 20 and stopping and displaying (deriving) the fixed normal design as a result of the fluctuation display of the normal design. ing. Then, whether or not the hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit is turned on is determined, and when the hit flag is on, the value of the normal pattern process flag is updated to "4". be. On the other hand, when the hit flag is off, the value of the normal pattern process flag is updated to "0".

131FS104 normal per design opening pre-processing is executed when the value of the normal pattern process flag is "4". In this normal symbol per opening pre-processing, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened (executing the opening control) based on the fact that the variable display result of the normal symbol is "win" or the game state. It includes processing for setting. For example, when the game state is a time saving state (high probability high base state or low probability high base state), the opening period of the variable winning ball device 6B is determined to 3 seconds, and the game state is a non-time saving state (low probability In the case of low base state or high probability low base state), the opening period of the variable winning ball device 6B is set to 0.1 seconds, etc., a period in which the game ball is less likely to enter the second start winning opening than in the case of the time saving state should be set to

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the gaming state is a time saving state, the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened more than when the gaming state is a non-time saving state, and the variable winning ball device 6B is used for a long period of time. Although the game ball is made to easily enter the second start winning opening by opening, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the game state is the time saving state, the game state is the non-time saving state. The variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a longer period of time than when the game state is a non-time-saving state, and the game state is a non-time-saving state. By executing at least one such as increasing the number of opening times of the variable winning ball device 6B, the game ball should be easier to win the second start winning hole than in the non-time saving state.

131FS105 normal per design during open processing, is executed when the value of the normal pattern process flag is "5". In this normal per symbol opening process, whether or not it is time to return the variable winning ball device 6B from the open state to the closed state based on the processing of measuring the elapsed time after the variable winning ball device 6B is opened. It includes processing to determine whether Then, when returning the variable winning ball device 6B to the closed state, the value of the normal pattern process flag is updated to "6" after executing the processing of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid.

131FS106 normal per open post-processing is executed when the value of the normal pattern process flag is "6". This normal per symbol open post-processing includes a process for determining whether or not the number of times the variable winning ball device 6B is opened has reached the maximum number of times the variable winning device has been opened. When the variable winning device opening number maximum value is not reached, the value of the normal pattern process flag is updated to "5", while when the variable winning device opening number maximum value is not reached, the normal pattern process flag value is set to " 0”.

[Main configuration and effect of characteristic portion 131F]
Next, the main configuration and effects of the characterizing portion 131F described above will be described.

(1) As shown in FIG. 9-1, the normal figure operating port 50 is provided downstream of the variable winning ball device 6B. When the player hits to the right in the high base state, the variable winning ball device 6B is more likely to be controlled in the open state than in the normal state, so that the ratio of game balls entering the variable winning ball device 6B is higher than in the normal state, but there is an obstacle. The game ball may not enter the variable winning ball device 6B due to the positional relationship of the nail or the like. Also, in the high base state, the game ball flowing down the right side area has a higher rate of entering the normal figure operation opening 50 than being discharged from the out opening 51 due to the positional relationship of the obstacle nail, the arrangement relationship of the structure, etc. It's becoming Therefore, even if it does not enter the variable winning ball device 6B, the game machine often enters the normal pattern operation opening 50 with one payout. In this way, even if the game ball does not enter the variable winning ball device 6B in the high base state, it is possible to reduce the decline in the interest of the game by entering the normal figure operation opening 50. .

Also, it is conceivable that the percentage of game balls passing through the passage gate 41 as the uppermost structure when striking to the right becomes excessively high due to the positional relationship of the obstructing nails. In such a case, the proportion of game balls entering the variable winning ball device 6B located directly below the passage gate 41 in the high base state is also excessively high. Therefore, when the game ball enters excessively, many variable displays are executed in a short time, and the interval between big hits is shortened. Then, there is a concern that the emissivity becomes too high. In such a case, if the fluctuation time in the high base is lengthened, the projectiveness itself can be suppressed, but it is not preferable because there is a possibility that a sense of elongation will occur. Therefore, by arranging the obstacle nail so that the game ball does not excessively enter the passage gate 41 when striking to the right, and by arranging the normal figure operation opening 50 at the lower position of the right flow path, the variable display is moderately displayed. It can be made to be executed, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a feeling of elongation while suppressing the ejaculation.

(2) As shown in FIG. 9-1, the out port 51 is provided at the bottom of the right side area. In this way, even if game balls do not enter the variable winning ball device 6B in the high base state, the rate of entering the specific area can be made higher than the rate of entering the out port 51. A decline in interest can be reduced.

(3) When a game ball enters the normal pattern operation port 50, there is one payout equal to the number of entries. In this way, even if game balls do not enter the variable winning ball device 6B in the high base state, the same number of game balls as the number of game balls entered is given, so that the decline in interest can be reduced. can.

(4) As shown in FIG. 9-1, the normal figure operating port 50 is provided downstream of the special variable winning ball device 7 . In this way, even if the game ball does not enter the variable winning ball device 6B in the high base state, it is possible to reduce the decrease in interest. In addition, since the rate of entering the normal figure operation port 50 is higher than that discharged from the out port 51, even if the game ball does not enter the special variable winning ball device 7, it enters the special variable winning ball device 7. It is possible to reduce the ball loss when it is not done.

(5) Variable display of normal symbols is also executed when a game ball enters the passage gate 41 different from the normal symbol operation port 50 . In other words, there are multiple triggers for variable display in the high base state. In this way, even if the game ball does not enter the variable winning ball device 6B in the high base state, it is possible to reduce the decrease in interest.

In addition, even if the frequency of game balls entering the normal pattern operation opening 50 decreases due to the arrangement of the obstructing nails, by increasing the passage ratio of the passage gate 41 side, the variable display of the second special pattern is suitable. can be executed at a reasonable rate. Conversely, even if the frequency of game balls entering the passage gate 41 decreases due to the arrangement of the obstruction nails, the second special symbol can be variably displayed by increasing the passage ratio of the normal pattern operation port 50 side. can be performed at any suitable rate. In this manner, the frequency of entry between the normal pattern operation opening 50 and the passage gate 41 can be adjusted according to the arrangement of the obstructing nails.

Further, even if a failure such as breakage or bending of the obstacle nail occurs, if the game ball enters either the normal pattern operation port 50 or the passage gate 41, the normal pattern fluctuation is executed. can increase security against the execution of In addition, by separately providing the normal map operation port 50, it becomes easy to adjust the base value during the high base state by adjusting the obstacle nail, so even after the layout of the structure on the board surface is fixed at the time of development Also, the adjustment of the base value can be facilitated by slightly changing the arrangement of the obstructing nails.

(6) As shown in FIG. 9-1, the passage gate 41 is provided on the upstream side of the variable winning ball device 6B, and the game ball that has entered the passing gate 41 continues to the variable winning ball device 6B directly below. It is possible to enter. In this way, the game balls that have entered the passage gate 41 continue to enter the variable winning ball device 6B, so that waste of game balls can be prevented.

(7) When a game ball enters the variable winning ball device 6B, there is one payout equal to the number entered. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the number of game balls from increasing too much during a high base.

(8) In the high base state, the game ball that has flowed down to the right area has a higher rate of entering the normal pattern operation opening 50 than the rate of entering the variable winning ball device 6B. In this way, even if the game ball does not enter the variable winning ball device 6B while preventing the rate of entering the variable winning ball device 6B during the high base from being too high, the normal figure operation opening By entering the game ball into 50, the situation disadvantageous to the player can be reduced.

[Main Modifications of Characteristic Portion 131F]
Although the characteristic portion 131F has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to that shown in this example, and any changes or additions within the scope of the present invention can be applied to the present invention. included. Modifications of the characteristic portion 131F will be described below.

(1) In the characteristic portion 131F, the rate at which the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 is set lower than the passing rate in normal models when hitting to the right during a high base. It is also possible to prevent game balls from entering the winning ball device 6B too much. By doing so, it is possible to prevent frequent occurrence of shortening fluctuations due to accumulation of four second reserved storage numbers. In such a case, it is desirable that the rate of game balls entering the normal pattern operation opening 50 is higher than the rate of game balls entering the passage gate 41 . For example, the obstructing nails may be arranged such that most of the game balls that have not passed through the passage gate 41 enter the normal pattern operation opening 50 . In this way, when hitting to the right, by reducing the frequency of shortening fluctuations, it is possible to secure the payout due to the game ball passing through the normal figure operation opening 50 while extending the entire time during high base. , can facilitate the design of the base value of the pachinko game machine.

(2) In the characteristic portion 131F, the interval period between rounds during the jackpot game may be longer than that of the normal machine (for example, 4 seconds). Then, even if the interval period is long, the normal pattern operation port 50 is provided at a position downstream of the special variable winning ball device 7, and most of the game balls that do not enter the special variable winning ball device 7 are normal. The obstacle nail may be arranged such that the game ball passes through the figure operation opening 50. - 特許庁In this way, during the interval period, the game ball is shot by the player, and in order to prevent the game ball from entering the out port 51 or the like, the stop shot is executed to stop the shooting of the game ball. and the overall time during the jackpot game can be extended. Thereby, it is possible to easily design the base value of the pachinko game machine.

(3) In the characteristic part 131F, the movable wing pieces of the electric tulip-shaped accessory in the variable winning ball device 6B are switched between the open state and the closed state by the rotating operation. However, instead of the rotating motion, the advancing motion and the retreating motion may be executed with respect to the game area. Also, the winning device corresponding to the second special symbol may have a non-movable structure like the winning ball device 6A. In such a case, whether or not the game ball enters the winning device may be controlled by a structure that operates in front of the winning device corresponding to the second special symbol.

(4) In the characteristic portion 131F, the number of game balls paid out when entering the variable winning ball device 6B and the normal pattern operation opening 50 was one, which is the same as the number required for entry. However, at least one of the variable winning ball device 6B and the normal pattern operation opening 50 may be different than one.

(5) In the characteristic portion 131F, the setting suggestion effect may be executed each time the total number of game balls entering the variable winning ball device 6B reaches a predetermined number (for example, 30 times). Moreover, whenever the total number of game balls that have entered the normal pattern operation port 50 becomes a predetermined number (for example, 30 times), the setting suggestion effect may be executed. Moreover, whenever the total number of the game balls that have entered the variable winning ball device 6B and the game balls that have entered the normal figure operation port 50 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50 times), the setting suggestion effect may be executed. For example, if the setting suggesting effect is executed every time the total number of game balls that have entered the normal pattern operation port 50 reaches 30 times, it is possible to add interest to continuing to hit right during high base. , the interest in the game is improved. Also, execution of the setting suggestion effect may be determined by a predetermined lottery when the game ball enters instead of the number of times.

(6) In the characterizing portion 131F, the setting suggestion effect may be executed each time the total number of game balls that have entered the regular pattern operation opening 50 during the jackpot game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 30 times). In this way, it is possible to improve the interest of the presentation using the normal pattern operation opening 50 during the big hit game.

(7) In the characteristic portion 131F, both the game balls that have flowed down in the left side area and the game balls that have flowed down in the right side area have entered one out port 51 provided at the bottom of the game area as a discharge area. However, a plurality of discharge areas may be provided in the game area. Also, the game balls that have flowed down may enter different discharge areas in the left area and the right area.

(Explanation relating to association of characteristic parts)
Each configuration relating to a characteristic portion may be appropriately combined with part or all of each configuration relating to another characteristic portion. Features that are combined in this way, or individual features that are not combined, may be combined with part or all of each configuration relating to other features as appropriate.

It should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the scope of the claims.

Further, all or part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, and the configurations shown in later-described embodiment examples and each modified example may be arbitrarily combined.

In addition, it should be considered that the above-mentioned embodiment disclosed this time and the below-mentioned form are examples in all respects, and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the scope of the claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player,
A game area where game media can flow down (for example, a game area formed on the game board 2);
a discharge area (e.g., out port 51) capable of discharging a game medium (e.g., game ball) to the outside of the game area;
State control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling the game state;
and a value giving means (for example, payout control board) for giving value,
The state control means can be controlled to any game state including at least a normal state (eg, normal state), a special state (eg, high base state), and the advantageous state (eg, jackpot game state). can be,
The game area includes a first area (e.g., left side area) and a second area (e.g., right side area) different from the first area,
In the second area,
Based on the variable display result of the normal identification information (for example, normal pattern), a first state (for example, open state) in which the game medium can easily enter and a second state (for example, closed state) in which the game medium is difficult or impossible to enter state) and a normal variable device (for example, variable winning ball device 6B),
A specific area (for example, the normal figure operation opening 50) that can execute the variable display of the normal identification information by entering the game medium is provided,
Based on being controlled to the special state by the state control means, the normal variable device is more easily controlled to the first state than the normal state (for example, in the high base state, the variable winning ball device 6B easier to control in the open state than in the normal state),
The value giving means gives a value equal to or less than a predetermined value required for the game medium to enter the specific area based on the entry of the game medium into the specific area (e.g. There is one payout if a ball enters),
The specific area is provided at a downstream position from the normal variable device (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-1, the normal pattern operation port 50 is provided at a downstream position from the variable winning ball device 6B) ,
A gaming medium that has flowed down the second region in the special state has a higher rate of entering the specific region than being discharged in the discharge region (for example, a game ball that has flowed down the right side region in the high base state , the ratio of entering the normal figure operation port 50 is higher than being discharged at the out port 51),
The discharge area is provided at the bottom of the second area (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-1, the out port 51 is provided at the bottom of the right area),
moreover,
Specific display means (for example, effect control CPU 120 that performs pending display and active display) that can display specific display related to variable display on the display means;
A change effect execution means capable of executing a change effect that changes the display color of the specific display (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of 074AKS035),
The display color of the specific display differs depending on the degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state (for example, when the active display (including the case where it changes at the stage of pending display) changes to the "red" stage , the variable display result will always be a "jackpot", etc.),
There are a normal effect state and a specific effect state, which is a state of effect that can be shifted from the normal effect state, and in which the ratio of control to the advantageous state is higher than that of the normal effect state (for example, a monochrome effect is executed. In this case, the expectation that the variable display result will be a big hit is higher than when the monochrome effect is not executed, etc.)
The specific rendering state is a rendering state in which the number of colors of at least a part of the display target including at least the specific display displayed on the display means is smaller than that of the normal rendering state (for example, rendering By performing monochrome output processing on the control board 12 side, it is an effect that changes the target image displayed on the image display device 3 to a monochrome mode, and is used when displaying a pre-stored effect image. For example, the number of colors to be displayed is displayed with fewer colors than the normal production state),
When the change effect execution means executes the change effect in the normal effect state, while changing the display color of the specific display to a display color according to the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state, When the change performance is executed by the change performance means in the specific performance state, a common display color is used without changing the display color of the specific display regardless of the degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state. (For example, during the specific effect state (when the monochrome effect flag is on), since the monochrome output process is being performed, even if the change effect of the success mode is executed, regardless of the degree of expectation of the big hit, hold The display and active display are displayed in "white".On the other hand, in the normal effect state where the monochrome effect is not being executed, the display color is displayed according to the degree of expectation according to the display mode change pattern, etc.),
When shifting from the specific effect state to the normal effect state, the display color of the specific display is displayed in a display color according to the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state (for example, in step 074AKS032, the display color is displayed in a monochrome mode. The number of colors used for the target image that was the display target returns to the normal number of colors, and the suspended display and active display whose display mode has changed due to the change effect are displayed in the changed display color, etc.). be done.

According to such a configuration, even if the game medium does not enter the normal variable device in the special state, it is possible to reduce the decrease in interest. Furthermore, the degree of expectation can be appropriately notified by color, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Also, as a specific display, a color may be displayed to indicate that the variable device is normally open to facilitate winning. By doing so, not only the feeling of anticipation for the big win, but also the expectation of winning the ordinary variable device can be expected, and the interest is improved.

In addition, it may be provided with a color that can be displayed only in the case of variation (special figure 2) that is executed based on winning a prize to the normal variable device. By doing so, for example, when the special figure 2 variation is more advantageous than the special figure 1 variation in the jackpot type, the color displayed only in the special figure 2 variation is displayed so that the player can win a more advantageous jackpot. It can be expected that it will become, and interest will improve.

In addition, when the normal variable device is opened in the specific effect state, if the normal variable device wins or if the normal variable device does not win, the display color of the specific display is changed for a predetermined short time. It is also possible to return to a common display color regardless of the degree of expectation after displaying the display color corresponding to the degree of expectation for a period of time. By doing so, the effect related to the degree of expectation of the specific display is intermittently performed in relation to the opening of the normal variable device, so that the interest in the specific effect state (special state) is improved. In particular, when the normal variable device is opened in the specific effect state and the normal variable device has not won a prize, the decrease in interest can be reduced. In addition, the production related to the degree of expectation of the specific display performed in connection with the opening of the normal variable device may be always performed when the normal variable device is opened, or may be performed when a predetermined lottery is won. may Further, when shifting to the specific effect state (special state), it may be performed when a predetermined lottery is won.

Furthermore, as another example of a gaming machine capable of improving interest, there is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for the player,
Specific display means (for example, effect control CPU 120 that performs pending display and active display) that can display specific display related to variable display on the display means;
A change effect execution means capable of executing a change effect that changes the display color of the specific display (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of 074AKS035),
The display color of the specific display differs depending on the degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state (for example, when the active display (including the case where it changes at the stage of pending display) changes to the "red" stage , the variable display result will always be a "jackpot", etc.),
There are a normal effect state and a specific effect state, which is a state of effect that can be shifted from the normal effect state, and in which the ratio of control to the advantageous state is higher than that of the normal effect state (for example, a monochrome effect is executed. In this case, the expectation that the variable display result will be a big hit is higher than when the monochrome effect is not executed, etc.)
The specific rendering state is a rendering state in which the number of colors of at least a part of the display target including at least the specific display displayed on the display means is smaller than that of the normal rendering state (for example, rendering By performing monochrome output processing on the control board 12 side, it is an effect that changes the target image displayed on the image display device 3 to a monochrome mode, and is used when displaying a pre-stored effect image. For example, the number of colors to be displayed is displayed with fewer colors than the normal production state),
When the change effect execution means executes the change effect in the normal effect state, while changing the display color of the specific display to a display color according to the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state, When the change performance is executed by the change performance means in the specific performance state, a common display color is used without changing the display color of the specific display regardless of the degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state. (For example, during the specific effect state (when the monochrome effect flag is on), since the monochrome output process is being performed, even if the change effect of the success mode is executed, regardless of the degree of expectation of the big hit, hold The display and active display are displayed in "white".On the other hand, in the normal effect state where the monochrome effect is not being executed, the display color is displayed according to the degree of expectation according to the display mode change pattern, etc.),
When shifting from the specific effect state to the normal effect state, the display color of the specific display is displayed in a display color according to the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state (for example, in step 074AKS032, the display color is displayed in a monochrome mode. The number of colors used for the target image that was the display target returns to the normal number of colors, and the suspended display and active display whose display mode has changed due to the change effect are displayed in the changed display color, etc.). be done. The form example of this gaming machine will be described below as another form example.

(Description of features related to set values)
Characteristic portions relating to set values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described below.

Although not shown, the main board 11 of the pachinko game machine 1 is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1 while being accommodated in a board case configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. ing. Although not shown, the main board 11 also includes a lock switch for switching to a set value change state in which the set values of the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and a jackpot switch to be described later in the set value change state. A setting changeover switch that functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as winning probability (ball-out rate), etc., and an open sensor that detects the opening of the gaming machine frame are provided. The set value change state in this embodiment is also a state in which the game hall staff or the like can check the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 (set value confirmation state).

Operation units such as the lock switch and the setting changeover switch, which can be operated by a staff member of the game arcade, are provided in the setting changeover body portion and housed together with the main board 11 in the board case. The lock switch and the setting changeover switch are exposed to the rear side through an opening formed in the rear surface of the substrate case so that they can be operated without opening the substrate case.

A board case accommodating a lock switch and a setting changeover switch is provided on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁Therefore, it is extremely difficult or impossible to operate the lock switch and the setting changeover switch when the game machine frame is closed, and can be operated by opening the game machine frame using a predetermined door key. . In addition, since the lock switch requires operation of a setting key possessed by a game hall attendant or the like, it can only be operated by an administrator who possesses the setting key. The lock switch is also a switch that can be switched between ON and OFF with a setting key. In this embodiment, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but one key may be used for both.

A display monitor capable of displaying set values and base values is arranged in the substrate case. The display monitor is connected to the main board 11 and arranged on the upper part of the board case. That is, the display monitor is arranged in front of the main board 11 in the board case when visually recognizing it. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the frame for the game machine is not opened, the front when the main board 11 is visually recognized means the back side of the game board 2 with the frame for the game machine opened. This is the actual front and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加In this way, the display monitor is arranged in front when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the game machine frame opened. However, the front when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko game machine 1 may be common.

The display monitor includes a first display section, a second display section, a third display section, and a fourth display section. The 1st to 4th display parts of the display monitor are all composed of 7 segments composed of 7 segments that draw the figure "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the 7 segments. . The first to fourth display sections of the display monitor are capable of lighting or blinking in various colors, such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white. It is also possible to display different colors or a so-called rainbow while changing these colors in an extremely short period.

As a predetermined position of the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1, for example, a game information display section may be provided at the lower left position of the game area. In the game information display section, a round indicator, a right-handed lamp, a probability variable lamp, and a time-saving lamp are collectively arranged. The round indicator can display the number of rounds of the big win game and the type of the big win during the big win game. The right-handed lamp lights up in a game state in which a game ball is launched toward the right game area, such as a low-probability base state or a big-hit game state as a time-saving state. The variable probability lamp lights up when it is in the variable probability state. The time-saving lamp lights up when it is in the time-saving state. The round indicator consists of 5 segments (LEDs).

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the probability of winning a big hit (ball output rate) changes according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit (ball output rate) is changed. The setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, and 6 is the highest ball payout rate, and the smaller the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the ball payout rate is. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the advantage is. As for the setting value, 6, which is the largest value, is the most disadvantageous value for the game arcade side, and the smaller the set value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the more advantageous the game arcade side is. If the ball output rate changes according to the set value, for example, the probability of a big win may change depending on the set value, or the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change depending on the set value although the jackpot probability is constant. good too. In this way, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player. The set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side.

FIGS. 10-1A and 10-1B are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination tables. Of these, FIG. 10-1 (A) shows a configuration example of the first special figure display result determination table used when the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. It shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used when the figure is the second special figure. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which the hit determination value to be compared with the random number MR1 for each set value is set to the variable display result of the special symbol (special symbol display result). is. The random number MR1 is a random number for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated within the range of 0-65535. The hit determination value in the display result determination table is also assigned to the special figure display result in the range of 0-65535. The display result determination table is not limited to using separate display result determination tables for the first special figure and the second special figure, and the display result determination common to the first special figure and the second special figure A table may be used.

When the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the hit judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the display result is 1020 to 1346. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss". When the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1346. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss".

When the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". When the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the probability variable state, the hit judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result, 1020 ~ Up to 1383 is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". When the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1383. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss".

When the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1272 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1429. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss". When the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1272 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1429. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss".

When the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1487. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss". When the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1487. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss".

When the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1556. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss". When the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1556. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss".

When the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1674. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss". When the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the variable probability state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1674. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss".

In each display result determination table, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values than when it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) are special figures of "jackpot" assigned to display results. As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) where the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, the determined probability (for example, 1/300 when the set value is 1, 1/280 when the set value is 2, 1/260 when the set value is 3, and 1/1 when the set value is 4). 240, 1/220 when the set value is 5, and 1/200 when the set value is 6), the probability of being determined when the special figure display result is set to "big win" and controlled to the big win game state is higher. (For example, 1/200 when the setting value is 1, 1/180 when the setting value is 2, 1/160 when the setting value is 3, 1/140 when the setting value is 4, and 1/140 when the setting value is 4. 1/120 for 5 and 1/100 for a set value of 6). Each display so that the probability of being determined to control to the jackpot game state is higher when the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is in the probability variable state (high probability state) than when it is in the normal state or the time saving state. In the result determination table, the determination value is assigned to the determination result as to whether or not to control to the jackpot game state.

Depending on each setting value, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the probability variable state for the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time-saving state is different (for example, if the setting value is 1, the jackpot probability in the probability-variable state for the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time-saving state) is 1.5 times, and if the setting value is 2, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the variable probability state for the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is about 1.56 times, and if the setting value is 3, the normal state or the time saving state The multiplier of the jackpot probability in the probability variable state for the jackpot probability is 1.625 times)), and the probability variable state for the jackpot probability in the normal state or time saving state at each setting value , may be set to a constant value (for example, 5 times).

In each first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability that the special figure display result will be "small hit" and controlled to the small hit game state will be the same value. A judgment value is assigned. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-1 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is regarded as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or setting value. The probability of being determined to control to the game state is set to 1/200. On the other hand, in each second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" is the first special figure. Determination values are assigned so as to be the same values different from those in the graphic display result determination table. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-1 (B), in the second special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is regarded as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or setting value. The probability of being determined to control to the game state is set to 1/100.

Regardless of the set value, the special figure display result is not limited to the form in which the probability of being determined to be controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" is the same probability, and the special figure display result is displayed according to the set value. The probability of being determined to control to the small winning game state as "small winning" may be varied. The special figure display result is not limited to a form with a different probability of being determined when controlling the special figure display result as a "small hit" according to the fluctuation special figure, and the special figure display result is " The probability that it is determined to control to the small hit game state as "small hit" may be the same probability.

Focusing on the numerical range of the hit judgment value assigned to "big hit" and "small hit" in each display result judgment table, in the first special figure display result judgment table when the game state is normal state or time saving state , the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set as the common numerical range of the big hit determination values for determining the big hit regardless of the setting value. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 to setting In the case of the value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively. Thus, in the first special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, if the set value is 1 While only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", if the set value is 2 or more, the numbers within the common numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are " assigned to the jackpot. The non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases. For this reason, the probability of a big hit increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the judgment value of the big hit (jackpot reference value). go.

In the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 32767 to 33094 among the hit determination values is a small hit for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set within the common numerical range of judgment values. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value is the set value of 6. In a numerical range different from the range (1020 to 1346) of the big hit determination value, 32767 is set in the range of 32767 to 33094 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit determination value. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. is set to When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the “jackpot”), while the set value 2 to setting In the case of value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively. Thus, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is a probability variable state, the hit determination value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, if the set value is 1, the common numerical range Only numbers within (1020-1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, numbers within the range of the common number range plus the non-common number range will be the "jackpot" assigned. The non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the reference as the setting value increases. For this reason, the jackpot probability is set to 1020 as a reference value (jackpot reference value) for the jackpot determination value, and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, thereby increasing the probability. go.

In the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the variable probability state, 32767 of the hit determination values are the same as the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. The range up to 33094 is set as the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value is the set value of 6. In a numerical range different from the range of big hit determination values (1020 to 1674), 32767 is set in the range of 32767 to 33094 as a reference value (small hit reference value) for small hit determination values. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. Set to a common numeric range. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 to setting In the case of value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively. Thus, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, out of the hit determination value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, if the set value is 1 While only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", if the set value is 2 or more, the numbers within the common numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are " assigned to the jackpot. The non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases. For this reason, the jackpot probability is set to 1020 as a reference value (jackpot reference value) for the jackpot determination value, and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, thereby increasing the probability. go.

In the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is a small hit for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set within the common numerical range of judgment values. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value is the big hit in the case of the set value of 6. In a numerical range different from the range of the determination value (1020 to 1346), 32767 is set in the range of 32767 to 33421 as a reference value of the small hit determination value (small hit reference value). This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values for determining the big hit regardless of the set value. is set to When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 to setting In the case of value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively. In this way, in the display result determination table for FIG. 2 when the game state is the variable probability state, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, when the set value is 1, the common numerical range ( 1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the numbers within the range of the common numeric range plus the non-common numeric range are assigned to the "jackpot" It is The non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the reference as the setting value increases. For this reason, the probability of a big hit increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the judgment value of the big hit (jackpot reference value). go.

In the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the same as the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, out of the hit determination value The range from 32767 to 33421 is set as the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value is the big hit in the case of the set value of 6. In a numerical range different from the range of determination values (1020 to 1674), 32767 is set in the range of 32767 to 33421 as a reference value of the small hit determination value (small hit reference value). This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In each display result determination table, regardless of the game state and setting value, determination included within a continuous numerical range consisting of a common numerical range or a common numerical range and a non-common numerical range based on the hit determination value of 1020 The value is set as the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, and regardless of the game state and the set value, the judgment value included in the continuous numerical range of 1 (common numerical range) based on the hit judgment value of 32767 is judged as the small hit. As a numerical range of values, a variable display result is determined.

In each display result determination table, if the variation special figure is the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same) be. In addition, depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs (small value in the display result judgment table for the first special figure) The number of determination values included in the numerical range of the hit determination value is 328, while the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the second special figure display result determination table is about 655. 2 times) On the other hand, the numerical range itself of the small hit determination value is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value).

In each game state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the probability of determining that the special figure display result is "big hit" and the big win game state is determined is the lowest, and the value of the set value is the lowest. Judgment values are assigned so that the larger the value is, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be determined to be controlled to the big hit game state as "big hit" (jackpot probability: setting value 6 > setting value 5 > setting value 4 > setting value 3 > set value 2 > set value 1). The CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and if the value of the random number MR1 matches one of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hit, the special symbol wins (big hit). It is determined to be A to big hit C). Also, when the random number MR1 coincides with one of the hit determination values corresponding to the small win, it is determined that the special symbol is a small win. In this way, the winning of the big win and the small win is determined with the probability corresponding to the set value. "Probability" shown in FIG. 10-1 indicates the probability (percentage) of a big win and the probability (percentage) of a small win. Determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control to the big win game state. It is also to decide whether or not to make it a big hit pattern. Also, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control to a small winning game state, but the stop in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It is also to determine whether or not the design is to be a small winning design.

The set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 are not limited to the configuration in which a total of six set values, ie, 1 to 6, are provided. Seven or more may be sufficient. The larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (increase in the probability of a big win, the easier determination of a specific kind of big win, etc.). It may be arranged such that the smaller the set value set in the machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player.

While the jackpot probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the game property itself is not limited to a form that does not change, but the game is played according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. The sex may change. For example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variable state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the game ball is set in the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a variable probability state based on passing through, the game ball has a different rate of passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game according to the variation special figure (so-called V variable probability type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the probability of a big hit is 1/320 and the probability of a small hit is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). A game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) that controls to a big hit game state based on the ball passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 may be used. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the game performance is the same, but the big win probability and small win probability are higher than when these set values are any one of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the probability is high and the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small (for example, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6). A common switch may be used for different purposes when the playability is changed according to the set value. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is set to a production switch (for executing a predetermined production each time a game ball passes through a prescribed area). switch), and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is a game switch (for controlling the game state to a variable probability state or a big hit game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch switch).

Next, the processing within the game control main processing in the characterizing portion regarding the set value will be described. FIG. 10-2 is a flow chart showing an example of processing performed in the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103. FIG. The processing in the game control main processing is, for example, in the game control main processing shown in FIG. ) and initial settings such as settings to make the RAM 102 accessible.

When processing within the game control main processing is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started while the clear switch is being operated. (Step S1A). Before the process of step S1A, the process of clearing the RAM clear flag indicating that the RAM clear process has been executed according to a predetermined condition may be performed.

If the clear switch is ON (step S1A; Yes), the RAM clear flag is set (step S2A) and the process proceeds to step S3A; if the clear switch is OFF (step S1A; No), step S2A , the process proceeds to step S3A.

At step S3A, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch is ON (step S3A). If the lock switch is ON (step S3A; Yes), it is further determined whether or not the open sensor is ON (step S4A). When the open sensor is ON, that is, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with the lock switch ON and the game machine frame open (step S4A; Yes), is the RAM clear flag set? It is determined whether or not (step S5A).

When the RAM clear flag is set (step S5A), a set value change process (step S6A) for changing the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to step S8A, If the RAM clear flag is not set (step A5A; No), set value confirmation processing (step S7A) for confirming the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to step S8A. move on. If the lock switch is OFF (step S3A; No) or the open sensor is OFF (step S4A; No), the process proceeds directly to step S8A.

The set value change process is performed by turning on the lock switch and the clear switch while the game machine frame is open when restarting the pachinko game machine 1 after turning it off. It is the process that takes place. In the setting value change process, a process of transmitting a setting value change start notification command to the effect control board 12, a process of updating the contents of the address F001 in the RAM 102 as a temporary setting value based on the operation of the setting changeover switch, According to the state of the lock switch, a process of updating and storing the temporary set value as an actual set value in the address F000 in the RAM 102 and a process of transmitting a set value change end notification command to the effect control board 12 are performed.

In the setting value confirmation process, when the pachinko game machine 1 is restarted after being turned off (power off), the lock switch 207SG051 is turned on (clear switch is off) while the game machine frame is open. This is a process performed by In the setting value confirmation process, the process of transmitting a setting value confirmation start notification command to the effect control board 12, the display of the setting value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 is started on the display monitor, and the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with A process of outputting a security signal to a management device such as a management computer of a game hall via a terminal board (not shown), and ending the display etc. according to the state of a lock switch, setting to the effect control board 12 A process of transmitting a value confirmation end notification command is performed.

It should be noted that in the set value change process and the set value confirmation process, from the start of each process, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B and the lighting of the round indicator, the first reservation indicator 25A, By starting the flashing of the second holding display 25B and the right-handed lamp, a player, a game hall staff member, or the like can see from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 that the pachinko machine 1 is changing or setting the setting value. It is sufficient if it is possible to recognize that the value is being confirmed. Further, the lighting pattern of the segments constituting the round indicator may be any lighting mode, especially as long as it does not correspond to any of the plurality of jackpot types. Further, the segments forming the round indicator may be illuminated in different manners at the start of the set value change process and at the start of the set value confirmation process.

In step S8A, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not the RAM 102 is to be cleared when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started this time (RAM clear processing (step S9A) is to be executed). (step S8A). If the RAM clear flag is set (step S8A; Yes), the RAM clear process (step S9A) is executed, and then the process proceeds to step S10A. If the RAM clear flag is not set (step S8A; No), the RAM is cleared. The process proceeds to step S10A without executing the process (step S9A). As other processing, the CPU 103 determines, for example, whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 was started by a cold start or whether it is restored to the state before the power failure (started by a hot start) depending on whether or not the RAM clear flag is set. ), perform processing corresponding to each (step S10A), and end the processing in the game control main processing.

In the RAM clearing process, data other than the set values and the RAM clear flag are cleared by storing "00H" in addresses other than the first address (F000) where the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are stored. processing takes place. In the RAM clearing process, data other than the set values are not cleared, but when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, a predetermined address of the RAM 102 (address F000 in the characteristic part 048AK of this embodiment) to FXXX) may be cleared.

The process of step S10A includes a process of blinking all the segments constituting the display monitor over the period of the cold start notification timer (for example, 5 seconds) when the pachinko game machine 1 is called and started. In addition, only some of the segments may be blinked, or at least some of all the segments forming the display monitor may be lit. Also, in the processing within the game control main processing, for example, based on the fact that an abnormal set value is stored in the RAM 102 (set value abnormal error), or that the power has been restored from a power failure during setting change, A process of transmitting an error designation command according to the abnormality of the set value to the effect control board 12 may be included. Furthermore, the first display section, second display section, third display section, and fourth display that constitute the display monitor are used to notify (error notification) that a set value abnormal error has occurred or that power has been restored from a power failure during setting change. A process of displaying "E." may be performed in each of the sections. In addition, the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and manages the game hall through a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko game machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a computer, and thereafter, the CPU 103 displays until power failure occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off by the operation of a game hall clerk, etc.). The monitor, the first special symbol display device 4A, and the second special symbol display device 4B may perform error occurrence notification.

In the processing within the game control main processing, after it is determined that the lock switch is ON in step S3A, when it is determined that the open sensor is OFF in step S4A, the opening of the gaming machine frame is detected. Since the operation of the lock switch is detected without being detected, an error designation command may be transmitted to the effect control board 12 and an error notification may be performed by a display monitor or the like. The process of step S10A may include a process of transmitting a set value notification command to the effect control board 12. The setting value notification command may be transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by the process of step S10A regardless of whether the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 is changed. As a result, on the side of the effect control board 12, when the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, regardless of whether or not the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is changed, the set value can be stored in a identifiable manner. can.

When an abnormal set value is set or when the power is restored from a power failure during the change of the set value, the display monitor, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B Notify the occurrence of an error. , the staff of the game hall or the like can recognize from both the front side and the rear side of the pachinko game machine 1 that an error has occurred or that the electricity has recovered from the power failure during the change of the setting value. . In addition, the security of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved by making it possible for the management device of the game hall to recognize the occurrence of an error in the pachinko game machine 1 or the recovery from a power failure during the change of the set value. become.

As described above, the display result determination table provided in the pachinko game machine 1 has a hit determination value of 1020 to 1237, regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, as shown in FIG. is set as a common numerical range for the jackpot determination value. If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 2 to 6 (if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is other than 1), the value corresponding to each setting value from 1238 The range up to is set as a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 2 to 6, the hit determination value of 1020 is used as the big hit reference value, and the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value are continuous. Since it is set to be a numerical range, when determining whether or not to be controlled to the jackpot game state, the value of the random number MR1 is from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to each setting value. It suffices to determine whether or not it is within the numerical range of up to . As a result, the processing load of the CPU 103 for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state can be reduced.

The numerical range of the jackpot determination value within the range of 0 to 65535 is set at one place with 1020 as the reference value, so compared to the case where multiple numerical ranges of the advantageous state determination value are provided, random It is not necessary to determine whether or not the numerical value MR1 is within the numerical range of the big-hit determination value (whether or not to control to the big-hit game state) multiple times. As a result, the processing load of the CPU 103 for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 10-1, in the display result determination table, regardless of whether the game state is normal state, time saving state, or variable probability state, the hit determination value 1020 is used as the big hit reference value, and the big hit determination Since the common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of values are set to be continuous numerical ranges, when determining whether or not to be controlled to the jackpot game state, the value of the random number MR1 is Whether it is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to the normal state or the time saving state, and whether it is within the range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to the probability variable state It is sufficient to judge no. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the processing load of determining whether or not the CPU 103 should control to the jackpot gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 10-1, in the display result determination table, the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value depending on whether the variation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure is different (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the first special figure display result judgment table is 328, whereas the small hit judgment value in the second special figure display result judgment table The number of determination values included in the numerical range is 655, which is about double). On the other hand, the numerical range itself of the small hit determination value is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value). Therefore, when determining whether or not to be controlled to the small hit gaming state, the value of the random number MR1 is within the numerical range from 32767 to the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the fluctuation special figure It suffices to determine whether or not Thereby, the CPU 103 can reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the small winning game state.

As shown in FIG. 10-1, the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the display result determination table is set to the pachinko game machine 1 regardless of the set value set to the pachinko game machine 1. It is set to a numerical range (32767 to 33094 or 32767 to 33421) different from the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value in the case of 6. Therefore, when determining whether or not to be controlled to the jackpot game state, it is determined whether or not the random number MR1 is within a numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to each set value. When it is determined whether or not to be controlled to the small hit game state, the random number MR1 is within the range from 32767 to the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the fluctuation special figure. It should be determined whether or not Thereby, the CPU 103 can reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the big-hit game state and the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the small-hit game state.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 74AK)
Next, the characterizing portion 074AK of this embodiment will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characterizing part 074AK of this embodiment, as the pre-reading announcement effect, a change effect is performed in which the display mode of the display corresponding to the variable display (suspended display or active display) is changed to a different mode than usual. In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 074AK, the image including the image that notifies the degree of expectation to be controlled in an advantageous state at least by the type of color, such as the display corresponding to the variable display, is set to the monochrome mode. It is possible to execute a monochrome effect that makes it impossible for the player to visually recognize whether the color is displayed (what degree of expectation the display color is). In the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic part 074AK of this embodiment, when the change effect is executed during the execution of the monochrome effect, the display color of the display corresponding to the variable display is displayed in a common color regardless of the degree of expectation, It has a feature that when the monochrome presentation ends, it becomes possible to visually recognize which level of expectation the display color is. Hereinafter, the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic portion 074AK having such characteristics will be described. Note that the description of the same parts as those described in the basic description above will be omitted.

Also, the state in which the monochrome effect is being executed may be referred to as the monochrome effect state or the specific effect state, and the state in which the monochrome effect is not being executed may be referred to as the normal effect state. In addition, in the monochrome rendering state in this embodiment, the background image is also in a monochrome mode, and is represented only by the shades of black. In addition, in the monochrome rendering state (specific rendering state), in addition to black shading, red or blue shading may be used, or black on green or black on red may be used. Furthermore, if it is impossible to recognize the degree of expectation due to color, and if the number of colors used is less than in the normal production state (unless it is full color), it is not limited to being displayed entirely in monochrome, for example, the background It may be displayed in two colors, such as displaying a part in monochrome (shading of black) and displaying the other part in yellow (a specific color such as yellow is displayed in that color, and the other part is displayed in may be displayed in shades of black). In addition, the monochrome effect changes the target image displayed on the image display device 3 to a monochrome mode by performing monochrome output processing on the side of the effect control board 12 along with the start of execution of the monochrome effect. This is an effect in which the number of colors used when displaying a pre-stored effect image is displayed with a smaller number of colors than in the normal effect state. In other words, it does not store separate data such as the effect image for monochrome effect, but during the execution of monochrome effect (during specific effect state), the target image such as pending display or active display is changed effect. It is displayed in a monochrome mode regardless of whether it is broken or not.

FIG. 11-1 is a flow chart showing an example of the starting winning determination process executed in step S101 of FIG. When starting the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the first start opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A is on ( step S201). When it is determined that the first starting port switch 22A is ON (step S201; Yes), the CPU 103 selects the first special figure. It is determined whether or not the number of first special figure reserved memories, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game used, has reached a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4") (step S202). At this time, the CPU 103 is the stored value of the first special figure reservation storage number counter (counter for counting the number of first special figure reservation storage) provided in a predetermined area (game control counter setting unit etc.) of the RAM 102 By reading the special figure reservation storage number count value, it is sufficient if the first special figure reservation number can be specified. If it is determined in step S202 that the number of first special figure reserved storage is not the upper limit value (step S202; No), the CPU 103 stores a starting opening buffer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control buffer setting unit, etc.) A starting port buffer value, which is a value, is set to "1" (step S203).

If it is determined that the first starting port switch 22A is off in step S201 (step S201; No), or if it is determined that the number of first special figure pending storage has reached the upper limit in step S202 (step S202; If Yes), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B is ON (step S204). When it is determined that the second starting port switch 22B is ON (step S204; Yes), the CPU 103 selects the second special figure. It is determined whether or not the second special figure reserved memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game used, has reached a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4") (step S205). At this time, the CPU 103 is the stored value of the second special figure reservation storage number counter (counter for counting the second special figure reservation number) provided in a predetermined area (game control counter setting unit etc.) of the RAM 102 By reading the special figure reservation storage number count value, it is sufficient if the second special figure reservation number can be specified. When it is determined in step S205 that the number of second special figure pending storage is not the upper limit value (step S205; No), the CPU 103 sets the starting opening buffer value to "2" (step S206). If it is determined that the second starting port switch 22B is not on (step S204; No), or if it is determined that the second special figure reservation storage number is the upper limit (step S205; Yes), the CPU 103, Terminate the starting prize determination process.

After executing either the process of step S203 or S206, the CPU 103 updates the special figure pending storage number count value according to the starting opening buffer value so as to add 1 (step S207). For example, when the starting buffer value is "1", the first special figure pending storage number count value is added by 1, while when the starting buffer value is "2", the second special figure pending storage number count value is added. Add 1. In this way, the count value of the first special figure reserved storage number is increased by 1 when the game ball enters the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is established. (increment). In addition, the second special figure pending memory number count value is increased by 1 when the game ball enters the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is established. (increment). At this time, the total pending memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending memory number counter provided in a predetermined area (game control counter setting section, etc.) of the RAM 102, is updated so as to add 1 (step S208).

After executing the process of step S208, the CPU 103 extracts a predetermined game random number corresponding to the occurrence of the starting winning (step S209). As an example, in the process of step S209, the random number circuit 104 or the random number data for determining the special figure display result is selected from the numerical data updated by the random counter or the like provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 (such as the game control counter setting section). Numerical data representing the numerical value MR1, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern are extracted. Numerical data indicating each random number extracted in this way is stored as pending data by being set at the beginning of the empty entry in the special figure pending storage unit corresponding to the starting port buffer value (step S210). For example, when the starting mouth buffer value is "1", the pending data is set in the first special figure pending storage unit. On the other hand, when the starting port buffer value is "2", the suspension data is set in the second special figure suspension storage unit. In addition, at this time, when the pending data is set in the first special figure pending storage unit, the CPU 103 controls the first pending indicator 25A to specify the number of the first special figure pending storage added by one. (For example, the number of lit LEDs may be increased by one). In addition, when the pending data is set in the second special figure pending storage unit, the CPU 103 controls the second pending display 25B to display the second special figure pending storage number added by one. You may make it carry out to the 2nd suspension indicator 25B (for example, the lighting number of LED is increased by one).

The first special figure reservation storage unit stores a special figure game (first special The pending data of the special figure game using the first special figure in the symbol display device 4A is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the first start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the entry of the game ball The CPU 103 extracts from the random number circuit 104 etc. the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, etc., as pending data. is stored until it reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). Thus, the suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage unit indicates that the execution (variable display) of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result in this special figure game (Special figure display result) Based on whether it is decided to control to the big hit game state, and whether the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes a specific mode (for example, ready-to-win effect etc.) Hold to make it possible to determine memory information.

In addition, the reservation number of the first special figure reservation storage unit and the display position of the reservation display pattern (controlled by the effect control board 12 side) basically correspond. Therefore, when the pending data is stored in the first special figure pending storage unit, the pending display pattern is displayed at the display position corresponding to the pending number associated with this pending data. For example, when the pending data is newly stored in association with the pending number "1", the pending display pattern is displayed at the first display position on the leftmost side of the first pending display portion 5HL. For example, when the pending data is newly stored in association with the pending number "2", the pending display pattern is displayed at the second display position located on the right side of the first display position of the first pending display portion 5HL. do.

The second special figure reservation storage unit stores a special figure game (the second It stores the pending data of the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the special symbol display device 4B. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the second start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), based on the establishment of the second start condition due to the entry of the game ball The CPU 103 extracts from the random number circuit 104 etc. the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, etc., as pending data. It stores until it reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). In this way, the suspension data stored in the second special figure suspension storage unit indicates that the execution (variable display) of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result in this special figure game (Special figure display result) Hold to determine whether it is decided to control to the big hit game state or whether the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes a specific mode (for example, ready-to-win effect etc.) memory information.

In addition, the reservation number of the second special figure reservation storage unit and the display position of the reservation display pattern (controlled by the effect control board 12 side) basically correspond. Therefore, when the pending data is stored in the second special figure pending storage unit, the pending display pattern is displayed at the display position corresponding to the pending number associated with this pending data. For example, when pending data is newly stored in association with the pending number "1", the pending display pattern is displayed at the first display position on the far left side of the second pending display portion 5HR. For example, when the pending data is newly stored in association with the pending number "2", the pending display pattern is displayed at the second display position located on the right side of the first display position of the second pending display portion 5HR. do.

After executing the processing of step S210, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a starting opening winning designation command prepared in advance to the effect control board 12 (step S211). After that, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a reserved storage count notification command prepared in advance to the effect control board 12 (step S212).

Subsequently, the CPU 103 executes a winning random number determination process (step S213). As described above, the random value determination process at the time of winning is a process of performing determination at the time of starting winning, and based on the random values MR1 and MR3 out of the random values MR1 to MR3 extracted in step S209, the random value is determined. This is the process of determining whether or not the variable display result of the variable display to be executed is a "big hit" or "small hit" and the variation pattern of the variable display (see FIG. 11-4). After that, the CPU 103 determines whether the start buffer value is "1" or "2" (step S214). At this time, if it is determined that the start buffer value is "2" (step S214; "2"), the CPU 103 clears the start buffer and initializes the stored value to "0" ( Step S215), the starting winning judgment process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the start buffer value is "1" (step S214; "1"), the CPU 103 clears the start buffer and initializes its stored value to "0". From (step S216), the process proceeds to step S204. Thus, even when both the first starter switch 22A and the second starter switch 22B simultaneously detect valid starting winnings of game balls, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be reliably completed.

FIG. 11-2 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S213 of FIG. 11-1 as the winning random number determination process. In this embodiment, when the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols is started, the special symbol normal processing is performed to set the special symbol display result (variable display result of the special symbol) as "big hit" or "small hit". A determination is made as to whether or not to control the state or the small winning game state. Further, in the variation pattern setting process, determination of variation patterns corresponding to the variable display mode of the decoration pattern, etc. are performed. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, in the random value determination process at the time of winning, the game ball is extracted at the start winning timing when it is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening). Determination of whether or not the variable display result of the variable display to be executed of the random value obtained (the random value extracted in the process of step S209) is a "big hit" or "small hit", and determination of whether or not the variable display of the decorative pattern Determine which variation pattern will be (so-called "look ahead"). As a result, before the start of the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the start winning opening (before the condition for starting the special symbol game is established), the special symbol display result is "big hit" or A "small hit" or a variable display mode of decorative patterns becomes a predetermined display mode is read in advance, and based on the result of the read-ahead, the performance control CPU 120 or the like on the side of the performance control board 12 controls the pending display. The display mode and the like can be determined.

In the random number determination process at the time of winning shown in FIG. ) or the state of the variable probability flag (the flag that is turned on when the variable probability state), etc., to specify the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (step S301). The CPU 103 checks whether or not the current game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a jackpot game state by, for example, confirming the value of a special figure process flag provided in a predetermined area (game control flag control unit, etc.) of the RAM 102. identify. For example, when the value of the special figure process flag is "4" to "7", the current game state in the pachinko game machine 1 may be specified as a jackpot game state.

Following the processing of step S301, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the identified game state is a big win, which is a big win game state (step S302). When it is determined that it is not in the middle of a big hit (step S302; No), the CPU 103 further determines whether or not it is in a high base in which high opening control accompanying time saving control is performed in the variable probability state or the time saving state (step S303 ). When it is determined that the high base is in progress (step S303; Yes), or when it is determined in the process of step S302 that the jackpot is in progress (step S402; Yes), the CPU 103 determines that the start buffer value is "2" It is determined whether or not there is (step S304). When it is determined that the starting buffer value is not "2" (step S304; No), the CPU 103 performs setting for limiting the winning determination (step S306).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the start buffer value is "2" (step S304; Yes), or when it is determined in the process of step S303 that the high base is not in progress (step S303; No), the CPU 103 10 (A), (B) from the first special figure display result determination table or the second special figure display result determination table, corresponding to the start opening buffer value ("1" or "2") and the current game state to select the special figure display result decision table used for deciding the special figure display result (step S305).

Following the processing of step S305, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range (step S307). For example, the CPU 103 compares each decision value included in the jackpot decision range and the random number MR1 for deciding the special figure display result extracted by the process of step S209 shown in FIG. 11-1 one by one, It may be determined whether or not there is a determined value that matches the random value MR1. Alternatively, numerical values indicating the minimum (lower limit) and maximum (upper limit) of the determination values included in the jackpot determination range are set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 and the minimum and maximum values of the jackpot determination range. By comparing, it may be determined whether or not the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range. At this time, by determining that the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it is determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number MR1 is determined to be "big hit" (jackpot start determination). can.

In addition, in the process of step S307, for example, the CPU 103 reads the random number value MR1 stored in the special figure reservation storage unit in step S210, and uses the read random number value MR1 to perform the above determination. In addition, the CPU 103 holds the random value MR1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (area other than the special figure reservation storage unit) or the storage area of the CPU 103 separately from step S210, and the above determination based on the held random value may be performed. This also applies to the random number value MR3, which will be described later. Thus, the random number value used in the winning random number determination process may not be the random number value stored in the special figure reservation storage unit.

When it is determined that it is within the jackpot determination range in the process of step S307 (step S307; Yes), the CPU 103 determines the jackpot type based on the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type (step S308). At this time, the CPU 103, according to the variable special figure ("first special figure" corresponding to "1" or "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified corresponding to the start buffer value , select table data for big hit type determination from the big hit type determination table. The CPU 103 refers to the selected jackpot type determination table data to determine which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined.

Following the process of step S308, the CPU 103 selects a later-described jackpot variation pattern determination table (see FIG. 11-5) prepared by storing it in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 and sets it in the use table (step S309). The big hit variation pattern determination table is a table for determining the variation pattern of the variable display that makes the variable display result "big hit", and each variation pattern is assigned a determination value to be compared with the random number MR3.

In the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 11-5, the determination ratio is described instead of the range of determination values. In an actual table, it suffices if a range of determination values corresponding to the determination ratios in FIG. 11-5 is assigned to each variation pattern. The determination ratio is a ratio where 100 is the entire range of values (1 to 900) that the random number MR3 can take. For example, as shown in FIG. 11-5 (A), when the jackpot type is probability variation / non-probability variation, the determination ratio of the variation pattern PB1-1 is 5, the determination ratio of the variation pattern PB1-2 is 25, and the variation pattern Since the determination ratio of PB1-3 is 70, the variation pattern PB1-1 is assigned a determination value 1 to 45 (range of 5%) that is compared with the random value MR3, and the variation pattern PB1-2 is a random value. Determined values 46-270 (25% range) compared with MR3 are assigned, and variation patterns PB1-3 are assigned determined values 271-900 (70% range) compared with random value MR3. This assignment of decision values is the same for other tables describing decision percentages.

When it is determined that it is not within the big hit determination range in the process of step S307 (step S307; No), the CPU 103 determines whether the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 is within the predetermined small hit determination range (step S310). The CPU 103 executes the same process as in the case of the big hit determination range for the determination value assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit" in the special figure display result determination table selected by the process of step S305. , and whether or not the random number MR1 is within the small hit determination range.

If it is determined that it is within the small hit determination range (step S310; Yes), a small hit variation pattern determination table prepared by storing it in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 (see FIG. 11-5 (B)) is selected and set in the use table (step S312). The small hit variation pattern determination table is a table for determining a variable display variation pattern in which the variable display result is a "small hit", and each variation pattern is assigned a determination value to be compared with the random number MR3. .

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not within the small hit determination range (step S310; No), a loss variation pattern determination table (FIG. 11-5 (C), (D)) is selected and set in the use table (step S311). Specifically, when the current gaming state specified in step S301 is a non-time saving state (low base state) (when the time saving flag is off), the loss variation pattern determination of FIG. 11-5 (C) When the table is set to the use table and the current gaming state specified in step S301 is a time saving state (high base state) (when the time saving flag is on), the loss variation of FIG. 11-5 (D) Set the pattern determination table to the used table. The loss variation pattern determination table is a table for determining a variable display variation pattern that results in a "loss" variable display result, and each variation pattern is assigned a determination value to be compared with the random value MR3.

After executing any of steps S309, S311, and S312, the CPU 103 determines the big hit variation pattern set in the use table based on the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern extracted in step S209. With reference to either the table, small hit variation pattern determination table, or loss variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern assigned to the determination value matching the random value MR3 is determined (step S313). For example, the CPU 103 compares the individual determined values assigned to each variation pattern with the random number MR3 one-by-one to determine whether or not there is a determined value that matches the random number MR3, thereby determining the variation pattern. Alternatively, by setting numerical values indicating the minimum (lower limit) and maximum (upper limit) of the determined values assigned to each variation pattern, the CPU 103 determines the random value MR3 and the minimum determined value A variation pattern may be determined by comparing with the maximum value.

After executing either of the processes of steps S306 and S313, the CPU 103 sets the transmission setting of the start-winning-time command according to the determination results of steps S308 and S313 (step S314), and performs the winning-time random value determination process. exit. The starting winning command is composed of a starting opening winning designation command, a special figure reservation memory number designation command, a symbol determination result designation command, and a variation pattern determination result designation command. When the starting opening buffer value is "1", the first starting winning opening designation command, the first special figure reserved memory number designation command, the pattern judgment result designation command, and the variation pattern judgment result designation as the start winning command Configure settings for transmission of commands. When the starting opening buffer value is "2", the command at the time of starting winning is the second start winning opening designation command, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the pattern judgment result designation command, and the variation pattern judgment result designation. Configure settings for transmission of commands. A command set for transmission is transmitted in the command control process.

The 1st special figure pending storage number specification command and the 2nd special figure pending storage number specification command to be set for transmission are the commands that specify the current 1st special figure pending storage number and the 2nd special figure pending storage number A command containing the corresponding EXT data), and the number of special figure pending storage to be specified may be specified by the count value of the first special figure pending storage number counter or the second special figure pending storage number counter. When the determination result of step S307 is within the jackpot determination range (step S307; Yes), the symbol designation command to be transmitted is a command designating that the determination result of the variable display result is "big hit" ("big hit"). command including corresponding EXT data), and when the determination result of step S307 is within the small hit determination range (step S310; Yes), a command specifying that the determination result of the variable display result is "small hit" (" command including EXT data corresponding to "small hit"), and when the determination result of step S310 is not within the small hit determination range (step S310; No), the command specifying that the determination result of the variable display result is "loss" (command including EXT data corresponding to "failure"), and when the determination result of step S303 is the start buffer value = 1 (step S304; No), "no determination" that determination at the time of starting winning is not performed (a command including EXT data corresponding to "no judgment"). The variation pattern determination result specification command to be set for transmission is a command that specifies the variation pattern that is the determination result when the variation pattern is determined in step S313 (a command that includes EXT data corresponding to the variation pattern that is the determination result), When the determination result of step S304 is the start buffer value=1 (step S304; No), a command (EXT command including data).

In the random number determination process at the time of winning, as described above, the variable display corresponding to the random number MR1 to MR3 extracted in step S209 this time is determined whether the variable display result of the variable display (special game) is "big hit" or "small hit". It is determined whether or not it will be a hit, and the variation pattern of the variable display (see FIG. 11-5) is determined, and so-called look-ahead is performed. In this process, the determination is made based on the current game state, and not based on the game state when the variable display is actually executed. Variable display results and variation patterns can be predicted with precision. In addition, in the random number determination process at the time of winning, when it is determined that it is a big hit in the process of step S302, or based on the fact that it is determined that it is under time reduction control in the process of step S303, it is started by the process of step S304 Determine whether the mouth buffer value is "2". At this time, when the start buffer value is "1" and not "2", the process of step S305 and the like is not executed, and the process proceeds to step S314, and the start win determination is not performed. Thus, when the high opening control accompanying the time-saving control is performed, or when the jackpot game state, the starting winning (first starting winning) due to the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning opening based on the occurrence of each of the above Restricts judgment from being made. As a result, when the special game using the second special figure is executed with priority over the special game using the first special figure, the first start winning prize is obtained during the time saving control or in the jackpot game state. It is possible to ensure the soundness of the game by restricting the execution of prefetch based on.

FIG. 11-3 is a flow chart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process executed in step S111 shown in FIG. When the variation pattern setting process is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is ON (step S261). When it is determined that the big hit flag is ON (step S261; Yes), the CPU 103 determines a variation pattern corresponding to the big hit when the special figure display result is "big hit" (step S262). When it is determined that the big hit flag is off in the process of step S261 (step S261; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the small hit flag is on (step S263). When it is determined that the small hit flag is ON (step S263; Yes), the CPU 103 determines a variation pattern corresponding to the small hit when the special figure display result is "small hit" (step S264). On the other hand, when it is determined that the small hit flag is off (step S263; No), the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern corresponding to the loss when the special figure display result is "loss" according to the number of pending memories. (Step S265).

FIG. 11-4 shows specific examples of variation patterns in this embodiment.

Variation pattern PA1-1 is selected when the variable display result is "losing", specifies non-reach (variable display mode does not reach reach mode), and special figure variation time is normal It is a non-reach variable pattern of length. This variation pattern is a variation pattern that is selected when the number of reserved memories is less than two.

Variation pattern PA1-2 is selected when the variable display result is "losing", specifies non-reach (variable display mode does not become reach mode), and special figure variation time is longer than usual is also a short (shortened) non-reach variation pattern. This variation pattern is a variation pattern that is selected when the number of pending memories is two or more.

The variation pattern PA2-1 is selected when the variable display result is "losing", and is a reach variation pattern that designates execution of normal reach. The variation pattern PA2-2 is selected when the variable display result is "losing", and is a reach variation pattern designating execution of super reach A. FIG. The variation pattern PA2-3 is selected when the variable display result is "losing", and is a reach variation pattern designating execution of super reach B. FIG.

The variation pattern PB1-1 is selected when the variable display result is "big win", and is a reach variation pattern that designates execution of normal reach. The variation pattern PB1-2 is selected when the variable display result is "big win", and is a reach variation pattern designating execution of super reach A. FIG. Variation patterns PB1-3 are selected when the variable display result is "big hit", and are reach variation patterns that designate execution of super reach B. FIG.

The variation pattern PC1-1 is selected when the variable display result is "big win" and the big win type is "probability" and when the variable display result is "minor win", and designates non-reach. It is a non-reach fluctuation pattern. The variation pattern PC1-2 is selected when the variable display result is "big win" and the big win type is "definite hit", and when the variable display result is "small hit", and is dedicated to the big hit/small win. It is a reach variation pattern that specifies reach execution. Here, the definite/minor hit dedicated reach is a reach that can be selected and determined only when the variable display result is a definite big hit or a small hit. The decoration pattern for the sudden hit is a pattern in which a combination of left, middle, and right decoration patterns is stopped and displayed as ``3'', ``5'', and ``7''. Further, the decoration pattern for the small win is a pattern in which the combinations of the left, middle and right decoration patterns are stopped and displayed as "2", "4" and "6".

In the process of step S262 shown in FIG. 11-3, for example, the variation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined using the big hit variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. be done. As an example, in the big hit variation pattern determination table, a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern may be assigned to the determination result of the variation pattern. The CPU 103 refers to the jackpot variation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern read from the random number buffer for variation, and determines the variation assigned to the determined value that matches the random number MR3. The pattern may be determined (selected) as the current variation pattern. In addition, in FIG. 11-5(A), determination ratios are described instead of determination values.

In the process of step S264 shown in FIG. 11-3, for example, previously stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 101, using the small hit variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 11-5 (B), the variation pattern at the time of the small hit is determined. As an example, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern may be assigned to the determination result of the variation pattern. The CPU 103 refers to the small hit variation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern read from the random number buffer for variation. A variation pattern may be determined (selected) as the current variation pattern. Note that in FIG. 11-5(B), determination ratios are shown instead of determination values.

In the process of step S265 shown in FIG. 11-3, for example, using the loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. A variation pattern is determined. When the gaming state is a non-time saving state (time saving flag is off), the CPU 103 refers to the losing variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 11-5(C). When the game state is the time saving state (the time saving flag is ON), the CPU 103 refers to the losing variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 11-5(D). As an example, in each losing variation pattern determination table, a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern may be assigned to the determination result of the variation pattern. The CPU 103 refers to the losing variation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern read from the random number buffer for variation, and determines the variation assigned to the determination value that matches the random number value MR3. The pattern may be determined (selected) as the current variation pattern. Note that in FIGS. 11-5(C) and (D), determination ratios are shown instead of determination values.

As shown in FIG. 11-5, at the time of the big hit (probability / non-probability), the determination ratio of the variation pattern PB1-3 that executes the super reach B is the highest, the variation pattern PB1-2 of the super reach A, normal reach The determination ratio gradually decreases in the order of the fluctuation pattern PB1-1 of . At the time of loss, the determination ratio of non-reach fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (including PA1-2) is the highest, normal reach fluctuation pattern PA2-1, super reach A fluctuation pattern PA2-2, super reach B The decision ratio gradually decreases in the order of the fluctuation patterns PA2-3. For this reason, when Super Reach B is executed, the variable display result becomes a "big hit" at the highest rate. Then, in the order of super reach A and normal reach, the ratio of the variable display result to be "big hit" (so-called big hit expectation) decreases. In other words, the variable display with the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win has a higher percentage of the variable display result being a “big win” than the variable display without the ready-to-win effect. In other words, the longer the variable display period (variable display time), the higher the rate of the variable display result being a "big hit".

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-5, at the time of the big hit (probably), the decision ratio of the fluctuation pattern PC1-2 of the probability/small hit reach is higher than the decision ratio of the non-reach fluctuation pattern PC1-1. On the other hand, at the time of the small hit, the determination ratio of the non-reach variation pattern PC1-1 is higher than the determination ratio of the sudden probability/small hit reach variation pattern PC1-2. From this, when the variation pattern PC1-2 of the sudden/small hit reach is executed, the variable display result is likely to be "big hit (probably)", and when the non-reach variation pattern PC1-1 is executed, The variable display result tends to be a "small hit".

After executing any of the processes of steps S262, S264, and S265 in FIG. 11-3, the CPU 103 sets a special figure variation time (also referred to as variation time), which is a variable display time of the special symbol (step S266). The special symbol variation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from the start of the special symbol variation in the special symbol game to the derivation display of the fixed special symbol that is the variable display result (special symbol display result). is. Toku-zu fluctuation time, as shown in FIG. 12, is determined in advance corresponding to a plurality of fluctuation patterns prepared in advance. The CPU 103 can set the timing of deriving the variable display result of the special symbol and the decorative symbol by setting the special symbol variation time corresponding to the variation pattern selected in each process of steps S262, S264 and S265. The setting of the special figure fluctuation time is performed, for example, by setting a timer value corresponding to the special figure fluctuation time to a game control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

Following the process of step S266, of the special game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B, start Setting for starting the variation of the special symbols is performed so as to start one of the special symbols games for which the conditions are established (step S267). As an example, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", it is set to transmit a drive signal for updating the display of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", it is set to transmit a drive signal for updating the display of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. A special figure game is started by this. In addition, when the variable display using the first special figure is started, the CPU 103 controls the first reservation display device 25A to display the number of the first special figure reservation storage that has been subtracted by one. This may be performed by the pending indicator 25A (for example, the number of lit LEDs may be reduced by one). In addition, when the variable display using the second special figure is started, the CPU 103 controls the second reservation display device 25B to display the second special figure reservation storage number decremented by one. You may make it carry out to the reservation indicator 25B (for example, the number of lighting of LED is reduced by one).

After executing the processing of step S267, the CPU 103, in order to notify the effect control board 12 side of the special symbol display result, the determination result of the variation pattern, etc., the command at the time of the variation start of the special symbol (command at the time of variation start). Transmission settings are made (step S268). For example, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 transmits the first fluctuation start designation command, the fluctuation pattern designation command ( Command containing EXT data indicating the variation pattern determined in step S262, S264 or S265), display result specification command (command including EXT data indicating the determined variable display result), first special figure pending storage number specification command ( Command including EXT data indicating the number of the first special figure reserved memory count value subtracted by 1, that is, the number of the first special figure reserved memory when one reserved memory is consumed by the start of execution of the special game)) is sent sequentially. Make transmission settings for On the other hand, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 sends the second fluctuation start designation command, the fluctuation pattern designation command ( Command including EXT data indicating the variation pattern determined in step S262, S264 or S265), display result specification command (command including EXT data indicating the determined variable display result), second special figure pending storage number specification command (1 A command including EXT data indicating the second special figure reserved memory number count value that has been reduced, that is, the second special figure reserved memory number when one reserved memory is consumed by the start of execution of the special figure game) is sequentially transmitted. Configure transmission settings for

After executing the process of step S268, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to "2" (step S267), and ends the variation pattern setting process. By updating the value of the special figure process flag to "2" in step S267, when the next timer interrupt occurs, the special symbol variation process of step S112 shown in FIG. 5 is executed.

Next, processing in the effect control board 12 of the characterizing portion 074AK in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 11-6 is a flowchart illustrating an example of command analysis processing. In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 receives a start winning command from the main board 11 (start winning opening designation command, special figure reserved memory number designation command, pattern judgment result designation command, variation pattern judgment result designation command). It is determined whether or not there is (step S401).

When it is determined that the starting winning command has been received (step S401; Yes), the received command is stored in the starting winning command buffer (step S402). If the first start winning opening designation command or the first special reserved memory number designation command is received as a start winning command, the start winning command (first start winning opening designation command, first special reserved memory number designation command , pattern determination result designation command, variation pattern determination result designation command) are stored in a first start winning command buffer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 . If the second start winning opening designation command or the second special reserved memory number designation command is received as the start winning prize command, the start winning command (second start winning opening designation command, second special reserved memory number designation command , pattern determination result designation command, variation pattern determination result designation command) are stored in a second start winning command buffer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 .

FIG. 11-7(A) is a configuration example of the command buffer at the time of the first start winning. In the first start winning command buffer, various command data constituting the start winning command received at the first start winning are stored. In the command buffer at the time of the first start winning, a storage area that can store various data corresponding to the maximum number of the first special figure reserved storage (for example, 4) (corresponds to each of the reserved display numbers 1 to 4 area) is provided. As shown in the figure, the command buffer at the time of the first start winning in the characterizing portion 074AK in this embodiment stores various command data corresponding to the variable display being executed as the pending display number "0". is provided (the same applies to the command buffer at the time of the second start winning).

When there is a start winning to the 1st start winning mouth, four commands, 1st start winning mouth designation command, 1st special figure reservation storage designation command, pattern judgment result designation command, variation pattern judgment result designation command A set effect control command (start winning command) is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.例文帳に追加In the command buffer at the time of the first start winning, in addition to these first start winning opening designation command, first special figure reservation storage designation command, symbol judgment result designation command, variation pattern judgment result designation command, other information is each reserved A storage area is secured so that it can be stored in correspondence with the stored information.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the data specifying the start winning command from the top of the free area of the first start winning command buffer in accordance with the order of reception. The empty area of the command buffer at the time of the first start winning, that is, the data in the area where no data is stored is "0000 (H)". Therefore, when the starting winning command is received, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the minimum pending display number in which the storage area of the starting winning command is all "0000 (H)" in the first starting winning command buffer. Each performance control command data is stored in the storage area in the order of the first start winning opening designation command, the first special figure reservation storage designation command, the pattern determination result designation command, and the variation pattern determination result designation command.

In addition, the first start winning command buffer is provided with a storage area for storing display mode change patterns, which will be described later, as a storage area for storing other information corresponding to each of the pending display numbers. . The display mode change pattern is a type indicating a change (transition) pattern of the display mode of the pending display. The display mode change patterns corresponding to the pending display numbers "0" to "4" in the example shown in FIG. , "0", and "0" are stored. "PT4-4-22" and "PT3-2-04" are display mode change patterns determined when the pending storage count (holding count) is "4" and "3", respectively, as will be described later. There is a pattern in which the display mode changes twice and a pattern in which the display mode changes once. When the display mode change pattern is "0", the display mode change pattern is not set and the pending notice effect is not executed. remains "white" (in the illustrated example, the hold is not stored in the first place). Although illustration is omitted, information (stage number) is also provided (stage number storage area) (the same applies to the second start winning command buffer shown in FIG. 11-7(B)).

Also, FIG. 11-7(B) is a configuration example of the command buffer at the time of the second start winning. In the second start winning command buffer, various command data constituting the start winning command received at the second start winning are stored. In the command buffer at the time of the second start winning, a storage area that can store various data corresponding to the maximum value (for example, 4) of the number of the second special figure reserved storage (for each of the reserved display numbers 1 to 4 area) is provided. As with the first start winning command buffer, the second start winning command buffer in the characteristic part 074AK in this embodiment, as shown in the figure, has a pending display number of "0", which is displayed as a variable display during execution. An area is provided for storing various corresponding command data.

When there is a start winning to the 2nd start winning mouth, 4 commands of 2nd start winning mouth designation command, 2nd special figure reservation storage designation command, pattern judgment result designation command, variation pattern judgment result designation command A set effect control command (start winning command) is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.例文帳に追加In the command buffer at the time of the second start winning, in addition to these second start winning opening designation command, second special figure reservation storage designation command, pattern judgment result designation command, variation pattern judgment result designation command, other information is each reserved A storage area is secured so that it can be stored in association with the stored information.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the data specifying the start winning command from the top of the empty area of the second start winning command buffer in accordance with the order of reception. The empty area of the second start winning command buffer, that is, the data in the area where no data is stored is "0000 (H)". Therefore, when the starting winning command is received, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the minimum pending display number in which the storage area of the starting winning command is all "0000 (H)" in the second starting winning command buffer. Each effect control command data is stored in the storage area in the order of the second start winning opening designation command, the first special figure reservation storage designation command, the pattern determination result designation command, and the variation pattern determination result designation command.

In addition, in the second start winning command buffer, as in the first start winning command buffer, a storage area for storing other information corresponding to each of the pending display numbers is provided, and a display step change pattern described later is provided. A storage area is provided for storage. The example shown in FIG. 11-7 (B) shows an example in which the effect control command data is not stored in any of the storage areas of the pending display numbers "0" to "4".

Returning to the description of the flowchart of the command analysis process shown in FIG. 11-6, after executing step S402, or when it is determined that the start winning command has not been received (step S401; No), the effect control CPU 120 , determines whether or not a game state designation command has been received (step S403). When it is determined that the game state designation command is received (step S403; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 switches the ON/OFF state of the high accuracy flag and the high base flag based on the content of the received game state designation command. (Step S404).

The high probability flag is, for example, provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (for example, the effect control flag setting unit), and is turned on in response to the probability variable state, and the probability variable flag on the main board 11 side. The ON state/OFF state is switched corresponding to the switching of the ON state/OFF state. The high base flag, for example, is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (for example, the production control flag setting unit), and is turned on in response to the time saving state, and the time saving flag on the main board 11 side. The ON state/OFF state is switched corresponding to the switching of the ON state/OFF state. For example, the effect control CPU120, if the gaming state designation command is to specify a high probability high base state (for example, if the probability variation flag and the time saving flag specify that the ON state), high probability flag and high Both of the base flags are turned on (if they are already on, they remain on; hereinafter the same applies to the on/off states of both flags). If the gaming state specification command is to specify a high probability low base state (for example, if the probability variation flag specifies that the time saving flag is turned off in the ON state), the high probability flag is turned on, and the high base Turn off the flag. If the game state specification command specifies a low-probability base state (normal state) (for example, if you specify that the probability variation flag and the time-saving flag are off), both the high-probability flag and the high-base flag turn off.

After executing step S404, or when it is determined that the start winning command has not been received (step S403; No), the effect control CPU 120 executes other analysis processing (step S405), and performs command analysis processing. exit.

Here, with reference to FIG. 11-8, processing executed in response to reception of each effect control command in the command analysis processing will be described. The contents shown in the item "processing contents" shown in FIG. 11-8 are, for example, the processing executed in step S405. Further, the step number shown in the item "processing content" indicates the step number in the flowchart shown in FIG. 11-6, and means that the corresponding step processing is executed. Further, each reception flag and each storage area shown in the item of “processing content” are provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 . Also, setting the reception flag means turning it on.

For example, when the received production control command is a variation pattern designation command, the production control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 122 . Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets a variation pattern command reception flag.

Also, for example, when the received effect control command is a display result designation command, the effect control CPU 120 stores the received display result designation command in the display result designation command storage area formed in the RAM 122 .

FIG. 11-9 is a flow chart showing an example of the pre-reading notice setting process in step S161 shown in FIG. When the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 11-9 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the start winning command is received (step 074AKS001). When it is determined that the starting winning command has been received (step 074AKS001; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines that the received starting winning command is the first reserved storage number addition command received in the low base state or the high It is determined whether or not it is one of the second reserve storage number addition designation commands received in the base state (step 074AKS002). In this embodiment, by executing the processing of step 074AKS002, in the low base state, it becomes possible to execute the pending notice effect (change effect) when the pending memory increases based on the winning to the first start winning hole. , in the high base state, when the pending memory increases based on the winning to the second starting winning hole, the pending notice performance (variation performance) can be executed.

If it is determined to be either the first starting winning opening designation command received in the low base state or the second starting winning opening designation command received in the high base state (step 074AKS002; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines the display mode of the active display as the final display mode of the pending display to be displayed (step 074AKS003). For example, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the active display mode determination table shown in FIGS. It determines the display mode of the active display as the final change destination of the display or the reserved display displayed as the second reserved display (how many steps to change when the change effect is executed). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 may acquire the variable display result and the variation pattern of the variable display by referring to the symbol determination result designation command and the variation pattern determination result designation command included in the start winning command.

Next, determination of the display mode of active display will be described. In this embodiment, a change effect is executed in which the display mode (including at least the color) of the pending display corresponding to the variable display that has not yet started and the active display corresponding to the variable display that is being executed is changed step by step. . The active display mode determination table shown in FIG. 11-10 is a table for determining in advance the display mode of the active display (also referred to as "final display mode"), which is the final stage of the change (transition) of this display mode. The active display mode determination table, as shown in FIG. 11-10, is used to determine which of stages 1 to 4 the final display mode should be for each variable display result (including jackpot types and variation patterns). is assigned a determined proportion of More specifically, the variable display result is divided into "jackpot (probability / non-probability)", "jackpot (probability)", "losing (super reach) / small hit", "other than above", respectively, Different determination ratios are assigned to "white", "blue", "green", and "red" prepared as display colors of the active display. In this embodiment, active display is performed in colors such as white in stage 1, blue in stage 2, green in stage 3, and red in stage 4. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 11-10, when the variable display result is a "jackpot (probability variable/non-probability variation)" in which a 16-round game is executed, the active display mode (display color), which is the final display mode, is ``Green'', which is ``Level 3'', has the highest decision ratio, and the decision ratio is lower in the order of ``Blue'' for ``Level 2'', ``White'' for ``Level 1'', and ``Red'' for ``Level 4''. is set to On the other hand, in the case where the variable display result is a "jackpot (accurate)" in which two rounds of the game are played, the ratio of determining the active display mode (display color) to "green", which is "level 3", is the highest, Next, the decision ratio of "blue" in "level 2" is high, and the decision ratio of "red" in "level 4" and "white" in "level 1" is set to be the lowest. In addition, when the variable display result is "loss (super reach)" or "small hit" including super reach effects in the variation pattern, the active display mode (display color) is "step 2" "blue ” is the highest, followed by the same percentage for “white” in “stage 1” and “green” in “stage 3”, followed by “red” in “stage 4”. there is If the variable display result does not correspond to any of the above-mentioned "big hit (probability / non-probability)", "big hit (probably)", "losing (super reach)", and "minor hit", the active display mode ( display color), the decision ratio is set only for "white". Further, when the variable display result is "missing", the active display mode (display color) is set not to be determined to be "red".

With these settings, when the active display (including the case where it changes at the stage of pending display) changes to the stage of "red" in "stage 4", the variable display result will always be "big hit". can be notified. In addition, when the active display changes to the "green" stage of "stage 3", it can be suggested that the variable display result is likely to be a "jackpot" (probability/non-probability/abrupt probability). . In addition, if it remains "white" of "stage 1", the possibility that the variable display result will be "losing" or "minor hit" is high, and if the pending notice effect is executed (that is, When the display mode of the pending display changes), it can be suggested that there is a higher possibility that the control will be in a state more advantageous to the player than when it is not executed.

In the change effect (suspended notice effect), the display mode of "red" in "stage 4" in which the variable display result always becomes "big win" is also called a big win confirmation stage. In addition, the display mode of "red" in "stage 4" is the jackpot confirmation stage, and as shown in Fig. 11-10, 10% Because it is only selected, its rarity value is high. In the illustrated example, the display mode of "red" in "stage 4" is shown as the big hit confirmation stage, but for example, when the variable display result is "losing" or "small hit", it is also determined You may do so (that is, it may not be a big hit confirmation). In this case, if it is determined to be the "red" display mode of "stage 4", the possibility of becoming a "big hit" increases (the higher the number of stages, the higher the possibility of becoming a "big hit") ), it is sufficient to set the decision ratio.

Returning to FIG. 11-9, after determining the display mode of the active display by the process of step 074AKS003, the effect control CPU 120 determines the display mode of the active display determined in step 074AKS003, the first special figure pending memory number designation command and the second The display mode change pattern is determined according to the number of reserved memories indicated by one of the 2 special figure reserved memory number designation commands, and the first reserved display or the second reserved display is displayed (step 074AKS004). In addition, the number of reserved memories is the first special figure reserved memory number specification command when the first start winning mouth specification command is received, and the second special figure when the second start winning mouth specification command is received. It can be specified by referring to the reserved storage number designation command. In the processing of step 074AKS004, the display mode change pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 11-11 to 11-15 is referenced to determine the display mode change pattern for the first pending display or second pending display. The display mode change pattern indicates a change pattern such as how many times the pending display is shifted to which stage (which display color) to transition to until the active display, which is the final stage, is displayed. The display mode change pattern determined in step 074AKS004 is stored in the display mode variation pattern in the command buffer for the first start winning shown in FIG. 11-7 or the command buffer for the second start winning shown in FIG. 11-7. stored in the area.

11-11 to 11-15, the display mode change pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 11-11 to 11-15 determines the display mode change pattern indicating the change in the display mode of the pending display and the active display, which are subject to the notice of the pending notice effect, as described above. This table is referenced to The display mode change pattern determination table is divided according to the pending number (suspended display number of the pending memory that is the notice target of the pending notice effect) and the active display mode (final display mode). Specifically, depending on the number of pending "4" to "2", and the active display of "white", "blue", "green", "red" such as "stage 1" to "stage 4" The display mode change pattern determination table is divided according to the display color. In addition, in each display mode change pattern determination table classified by the number of reservations and the active display mode, "jackpot (16R)" ("jackpot (probability / non-probability)"), "jackpot (probability)", "loss (super A different decision ratio is assigned to the display mode change pattern set according to the active display mode (final display mode) for each variable display result such as "reach" and "minor win".

The pending display is displayed in any stage of 'white', 'blue', 'green' and 'red' such as 'stage 1' to 'stage 4' at the start of the pending display associated with the start winning. In addition, the pending display is displayed in shift as the pending memory is consumed, and at the timing when the change effect (holding notice effect) is executed, during the execution of the new variable display (including the variable display corresponding to the active display) , can be changed to different display colors (steps), and "white" as "step 1" → "blue" as "step 2" → "green" as "step 3" → "green" as "step 4" It changes step by step in the order of red. Also, the active display may be displayed by changing the stage from the reserved display corresponding to the reserved display number "1". In addition, when changing the stage, only a change to a higher stage is allowed (no change from a higher stage to a lower stage), for example, "white" in "stage 1" → "green" in "stage 3" It may be changed to a higher stage by omitting the middle.

Figures 11-11 (A) to 11-12 (D) show when the number of pending memories (holding number) is "4" (when the pending memory of the notice target of the pending notice effect is the hold display number "4") is a display mode change pattern determination table referred to by , and a display mode change pattern indicating a change in the display mode of the pending display corresponding to the pending display numbers "4" to "1" and the active display corresponding to "0" is set. It is

FIG. 11-11(A) is a display mode change pattern determination table referred to when the active display mode (final display mode) is "white" of "stage 1". As shown in FIG. 11-11 (A), when the final display mode is "white" of "stage 1", the pending display corresponding to the pending display numbers "4" to "1" and "0" Only the display mode change pattern PT4-1-01 (the number of display mode changes "0") is set so that the display color of the active display remains "white" of "stage 1", and the decision ratio assigned for each variable display result is set. is uniformly 100%.

FIG. 11-11(B) is a display mode change pattern determination table referred to when the active display mode (final display mode) is "blue" of "stage 2". As shown in FIG. 11-11(B), as the display mode change pattern, the display color of the pending display corresponding to the pending display numbers "4" to "1" and the active display corresponding to "0" is "stage 2". PT 4-2-01 (the number of times the display mode has changed is "0"), which remains "blue", and is "step 1" in the pending display corresponding to the pending display number "4", and the pending display number "3" ~ PT 4-2-02 ~ 05 (display mode change number of times "1") is set.

As shown in FIG. 11-11(B), when the variable display result is "loss (super reach)" or "minor win", display mode change pattern PT4-2-02 with display mode change count of "1" to 05, the decision ratio assigned to the display mode change pattern PT4-2-05 is the highest compared to other variable display results, and the decision ratio assigned to PT4-2-02 is the lowest. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "big hit (16R)", it is assigned to PT4-2-02 among the display mode change patterns PT4-2-02 to PT4-2-05 whose display mode change count is "1". The decision percentage is the highest and the decision percentage assigned to PT 4-2-05 is the lowest.

With such a setting, when a change effect is performed, the later the timing at which the display mode changes from "white" of "step 1" to "blue" of "step 2", the variable display is "big hit (16R) It can be suggested that there is a high possibility that Separately from this, when the display mode change pattern PT4-2-01 is executed, in which the pending display remains "stage 2" and does not change, there is a high possibility that the variable display result will be a "jackpot (16R)". The determination ratio of the display mode change pattern determination table may be set as follows. According to this, since the pending display of "stage 2" is performed from the beginning of winning, it is possible to give the player a sense of security. Also, the display mode change pattern determination table is determined so that the earlier the timing at which the display mode of the pending display changes from "stage 1" to "stage 2", the higher the possibility that the variable display result will be a "jackpot (16R)". You can set a percentage. According to this, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the pending display.

FIG. 11-11(C) is a display mode change pattern determination table referred to when the active display mode (final display mode) is "green" of "stage 3". As shown in FIG. 11-11(C), as the display mode change pattern, the display color of the suspended display corresponding to the suspended display numbers "4" to "1" and the active display corresponding to "0" is "step 3". PT 4-3-01 (display mode change count “0”), which remains “green” and does not change, and the pending display corresponding to the pending display number “4” is “stage 1” and the pending display number “3” PT 4-3-02 to 05 that changes from "white" in "stage 1" to "green" in "stage 3" in either the pending display or active display corresponding to "0" (the number of display mode changes "1 ”), and “blue” in “stage 2” in the pending display corresponding to the pending display number “4”, and in either the pending display or the active display corresponding to the pending display numbers “3” to “0” In PT4-3-06-09 (display mode change number "1") that changes from "level 2" "blue" to "level 3" "green" and the pending display corresponding to the pending display number "4" "Stage 1" "white" and "stage 1" "white" to "stage 2" "blue" in either the pending display or active display corresponding to the pending display numbers "3" to "0" , and PT4-3-10 to PT4-3-14 (the number of times of display mode change is "2") for changing from "blue" of "stage 2" to "green" of "stage 3".

As shown in FIG. 11-11(C), in the characterizing portion 074AK in this embodiment, the ratio determined so that the higher the number of times the display mode changes, the higher the expectation that the variable display will be a "jackpot (16R)". is assigned. Further, the determination ratio is assigned such that the later the timing of changing to the "green" display mode of "step 3", the higher the degree of expectation that the variable display will be "big hit (16R)".

With such a setting, when a change effect is performed, the timing at which the display mode changes to 'green' of 'stage 3' is delayed, and the greater the number of changes, the more the variable display becomes 'big hit (16R)'. suggest that it is likely. Separately from this, when the display mode change pattern PT4-3-01 is executed, in which the pending display remains "stage 3" and does not change, there is a high possibility that the variable display result will be a "jackpot (16R)". The determination ratio of the display mode change pattern determination table may be set as follows. According to this, since the pending display of "stage 3" is performed from the beginning of winning, the player can be given a sense of security. Also, the determination ratio of the display mode change pattern determination table is set so that the earlier the timing at which the display mode of the pending display changes to "stage 3", the higher the possibility that the variable display result will be a "jackpot (16R)". good too. According to this, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the pending display. In addition, the display mode change pattern is determined so that the pattern that changes from "white" in "stage 1" to "green" in "stage 3" at once in multiple stages has a higher possibility that the variable display result will be a "jackpot (16R)". You may set the determination ratio of a table. According to this, it is possible to exhibit an effect (impress the player) that has been upgraded in multiple stages, and to improve the game interest.

FIG. 11-12(D) is a display mode change pattern determination table referred to when the active display mode (final display mode) is "red" of "stage 4". As shown in FIG. 11-12(D), as the display mode change pattern, the display color of the pending display corresponding to the pending display numbers "4" to "1" and the active display corresponding to "0" is "stage 4". PT 4-4-01 (the number of times the display mode has changed is "0"), and the pending display corresponding to the pending display number "4" is "white" at "step 1", and the pending display PT 4-4-02 to 05 (display mode number of changes "1") and "blue" of "step 2" in the pending display corresponding to the pending display number "4", pending display or active display corresponding to the pending display numbers "3" to "0" Corresponds to PT 4-4-06 to 09 (number of display mode changes "1") that changes from "blue" of "stage 2" to "red" of "stage 4" in any of the above, and the pending display number "4" "Green" of "Stage 3" in the pending display, and "Green" of "Stage 3" to "Stage 4" in either the pending display or active display corresponding to the pending display numbers "3" to "0" PT 4-4-10 to 13 (the number of display stage changes "1") that changes to "red" of ", and "white" of "step 1" in the pending display corresponding to the pending display number "4", From ``white'' in ``step 1'' to ``blue'' in ``step 2'' and further from ``blue'' in ``step 2'' in either the pending display or the active display corresponding to the pending display numbers "3" to "0" PT 4-4-14 to 19 (display stage change number "2") that changes to "red" in "stage 4" and "white" in "stage 1" in the pending display corresponding to the pending display number "4" In either the pending display or the active display corresponding to the pending display numbers "3" to "0", from "level 1" "white" to "level 3" "green", further "level 3" " PT 4-4-20 to 25 (display mode change number "2") that changes from "green" to "red" in "stage 4", and in the pending display corresponding to the pending display number "4", "stage 1" " "White", and in either the pending display or the active display corresponding to the pending display numbers "3" to "0", from "White" in "Stage 1" to "Blue" in "Stage 2", to "Stage 2" ” from “blue” to “stage 3” “green”, and from “stage 3” “green” to “stage 4” “red” PT 4-4-26 to 29 (display stage change number “3 ”) is set.

As shown in FIG. 11-12(D), in the characterizing part 074AK in this embodiment, the rate is determined so that the higher the number of times the display mode changes, the higher the expectation that the variable display will be a "jackpot (16R)". is assigned. Further, the decision ratio is assigned such that the later the timing of changing to the "red" display mode of "stage 4", the higher the degree of expectation that the variable display will be a "jackpot (16R)". In addition, if the variable display result is "loss (super reach)" or "small hit", the final display mode will not be "stage 4", so the display stage change pattern PT4-4-01 to 17 has a determination ratio Not assigned.

With such a setting, when a change effect is performed, the timing at which the display mode changes to "red" of "stage 4" is delayed and the number of times of change increases, the variable display becomes "big hit (16R)". suggest that it is likely. Separately from this, when the display mode change pattern PT4-4-01 is executed, in which the pending display remains "stage 4" and does not change, there is a high possibility that the variable display result will be a "jackpot (16R)". The determination ratio of the display mode change pattern determination table may be set as follows. According to this, since the pending display of "stage 4" is performed from the beginning of winning, it is possible to give the player a sense of security. Also, the determination ratio of the display mode change pattern determination table is set so that the earlier the timing at which the display mode of the pending display changes to "stage 4", the higher the possibility that the variable display result will be a "jackpot (16R)". good too. According to this, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the pending display. Also, the display mode change pattern is determined so that the pattern that changes from "white" in "stage 1" to "red" in "stage 4" at once in multiple stages has a higher possibility that the variable display result will be a "jackpot (16R)". You may set the determination ratio of a table. According to this, it is possible to exhibit an effect (impress the player) that has been upgraded in multiple stages, and to improve the game interest.

FIGS. 11-13(A) to 11-14(D) are display stages referred to when the number of reservations is "3" (when the reservation memory of the notice object of the reservation notice effect is the reservation display number "3"). This is a change pattern determination table, in which display step change patterns indicating changes in the display steps of pending displays corresponding to pending display numbers "3" to "1" and active displays corresponding to "0" are set. In addition, FIGS. 11-15 (A) to (D) show the display step change pattern referred to when the number of reservations is "2" (when the reservation memory for the notice target of the reservation notice effect is the reservation display number "2") This is a determination table, and display step change patterns indicating the display steps of the pending display corresponding to the pending display numbers "2" to "1" and the active display corresponding to "0" are set. 11-11(A) to 11-12(D), similar to the display mode change pattern determination tables in FIGS. A determination ratio is assigned so that the variable display is more likely to be a "jackpot (16R)".

Returning to the explanation of the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. By making the image including the image notified by in a monochrome mode, a monochrome effect that makes it impossible for the player to visually recognize which kind of color is displayed (which display color is expected) A monochrome effect setting process for execution is executed (step 074AKS005). In the characterizing part 074AK in this embodiment, after executing the processes of steps 074AKS003 and 074AKS004, the monochrome effect setting process is performed in step 074AKS005. is executed, the display mode of the active display and the display mode change pattern may be determined.

FIG. 11-16 is a flow chart showing an example of the monochrome effect setting process executed in step 074AKS005 of FIG. 11-9. When the monochrome effect setting process shown in FIG. 11-16 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the monochrome effect flag indicating that the monochrome effect is being executed is set to the ON state (step 074AKS051). If the monochrome effect flag is ON (step 074AKS051; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 ends the monochrome effect setting process. The monochrome effect flag may be provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, for example.

When the monochrome effect flag is in the OFF state (step 074AKS051; No), the effect control CPU 120 performs a hold (including an active display) in which the display mode changes before the current hold targeted for the pre-reading notice. exists, that is, whether or not the display form of the pending or active display existing in front (display form in front) changes (step 074AKS051A). In step 074AKS051A, the content of the command buffer at the time of start winning may be checked to determine. Specifically, the display mode change pattern corresponding to the pending display number before the pending display number targeted this time is confirmed. Then, it is determined whether or not the front display mode changes.

When the front display mode changes (step 074AKS051A; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 terminates the monochrome effect setting process. In the characteristic portion 074AK, once the monochrome effect is executed, at least the monochrome effect is continued until the variable display corresponding to the target pending display is started. And it becomes impossible to visually recognize the change of the active display. Therefore, when the front display mode changes, the change in the front display mode is made visible without executing the monochrome effect.

When the front display mode does not change (step 074AKS051A; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the number of display mode changes is one or more, that is, whether or not to execute a change effect (step 074AKS052 ). Whether or not the display mode change count is one or more may be determined by confirming the display mode change pattern determined in step 074AKS004 of FIG. 11-9. When the display mode change count is 0 (step 074AKS052; No), the effect control CPU 120 terminates the monochrome effect setting process.

If the display mode change count is one or more (step 074AKS052; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the monochrome effect according to the variable display result and according to the determination ratio shown in FIGS. step 074AKS053). As shown in FIG. 11-17, in the characteristic part 074AK in this embodiment, when the monochrome effect is executed, the variable display result is determined to have a higher expectation of a big hit than when the monochrome effect is not executed. is assigned. In addition, when the monochrome effect is executed, the determination ratio is assigned so as to be super reach or higher (super reach loss, small hit, big hit). Not limited to this, even in the case of normal reach loss or non-reach loss, monochrome effect may be executed at a lower rate than other variable display results. In the illustrated example, an example is shown in which the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the monochrome effect is assigned according to the variable display result. Different determination ratios may be used. For example, the determination rate may be highest when the display mode of the active display is "red", and the determination rate may decrease in the order of "green" > "blue" > "white". According to this, it is possible to inform the player that the display mode of the active display will finally change to a highly expected display color, and to give the player a sense of expectation for the change in the active display.

Returning to FIG. 11-16, after executing the process of step 074AKS053, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is decided to execute the monochrome effect, that is, whether or not the monochrome effect is to be executed (step 074AKS054). If the monochrome effect is not executed, that is, if the monochrome effect is not executed (step 074AKS054; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the monochrome effect setting process.

If the monochrome effect is to be executed (step 074AKS054; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines the end timing of the monochrome effect from "timing 1" to "timing 1" according to the determination ratio shown in FIGS. 3” (step 074AKS055). The "timing 1" of the characteristic portion 074AK in this embodiment is the timing of the normal reach, that is, the timing immediately after entering the reach state, the "timing 2" is the timing at the start of the reach effect of the super reach, and the "timing 3 ” is the timing in the middle of the reach production of super reach. That is, "timing 1" is the earliest timing after the start of the variable display, "timing 2" is the next earliest, and "timing 3" is the latest timing. As shown in FIG. 11-18, in the characteristic portion 074AK in this embodiment, the degree of expectation is "timing 3" > "timing 2" > "timing 1", and the timing from the start of variable display to the end timing The determination ratio is set so that the longer the period (end timing is later) (in other words, the longer the execution period of the monochrome effect), the higher the degree of expectation that the variable display result will be a "big hit". Therefore, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the execution period of the monochrome effect. In addition, as shown in the figure, if the variable display result is neither "big hit (probable / non-probable)", "big hit (probably)", or "losing (super reach) / small hit", but "other than the above" , no decision ratio is assigned because no monochrome effect is executed.

Returning to FIG. 11-16, after executing the process of step 074AKS055, the effect control CPU 120 performs monochrome effect execution control for executing a monochrome effect (step 074AKS056). By performing the process of step 074AKS056, the execution of monochrome effect (monochrome output process) is started. As a result, monochrome target images, such as pending display, active display, and background image, are displayed in monochrome mode. In the characteristic portion 074AK of this embodiment, the pending display and the active display are displayed in the first stage "white" (displayed in a display color that is displayed at a high rate before the change effect is executed). In step 074AKS056, output sounds such as sound effects and performance sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like in accordance with the execution of the monochrome performance are muted, and a game effect lamp for game effects is turned off. Control for extinguishing 9 is performed. After executing the processing of step 074AKS056, the effect control CPU 120 sets the monochrome effect flag to the ON state (step 074AKS057), and then ends the monochrome effect setting process. In step 074AKS056, for example, when an image to be monochrome is displayed in two colors, black and white, by monochrome effect, the lighting color of the game effect lamp 9 is also changed to two colors, black and white. The number of colors may correspond to the number of colors.

Returning to the description of the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. If it is determined that it is neither a command (step 074AKS002; No), the effect control CPU 120 displays the first pending display or the second pending display in the first stage (white) display mode (step 074AKS005A ).

After executing the processing of either step 074AKS005 or step 074AKS005A, or when it is determined that the start winning command has not been received in the processing of step 074AKS001 (step 074AKS001; No), the effect control CPU 120 specifies the start of variation. It is determined whether or not a command has been received (step 074AKS006). Effect control CPU120, for example, by referring to whether or not either the first fluctuation start designation command reception flag or the second fluctuation start designation command reception flag is set, whether or not the fluctuation start designation command is received It is necessary to determine whether If it is determined that the variation start designation command has not been received (step 074AKS006; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the pending display setting process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start designation command is received (step 074AKS006; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the received variation designation command is the second variation start designation command (step 074AKS007). . When it is determined that the received variation start designation command is not the second variation start designation command, that is, the received variation start designation command is the first variation start designation command (step 074AKS007; No), the effect control CPU 120 Referring to the display stage variation pattern stored in the storage area of the display stage variation pattern in the first start winning command buffer shown in FIG. 11-7 (A), each first pending display is associated with It is changed or maintained according to the display step change pattern, and in the first reservation display portion 5HL of the image display device 5, the reservation display of the reservation display number "1" is moved (shifted) to the active display area, and "2 ” to “4” are moved (shifted) one by one to the right (step 074AKS008).

After executing the processing of step 074AKS008, the effect control CPU 120 erases the storage contents of the reservation display number "0" in the command buffer at the time of the first start winning, and corresponds to the reservation display numbers "1" to "4". After shifting the stored contents one by one (step 074AKS009), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated. It should be noted that the storage contents of the reserved display number "0" in the command buffer at the time of the first start prize are derived and displayed after the final stop pattern is derived and displayed in the effect processing during variable display in step S172, that is, the variable display result is derived and displayed. You can delete it later.

In the processing of step 074AKS007, if it is determined that the received variation designation command is the second variation start designation command (step 074AKS007; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 is the second start winning shown in FIG. 11-7 (B) By referring to the display step change pattern stored in the display step change pattern storage area in the hour command buffer, each second pending display is changed or maintained according to the display step change pattern associated with each, and the image display device In the second holding display portion 5HR of 5, the holding display of the holding display number "1" is moved (shifted) to the active display area, and each second holding display corresponding to "2" to "4" is moved leftward one by one (step 074AKS010).

After executing the process of step 074AKS010, the effect control CPU 120 erases the storage contents of the pending display number "0" in the command buffer at the time of the second start winning, and corresponds to the pending display numbers "1" to "4". After shifting the stored contents one by one (step 074AKS011), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated. It should be noted that the stored content of the pending display number "0" in the second start winning command buffer is derived and displayed after the final stop symbol is derived and displayed in the effect processing during variable display in step S172, that is, the variable display result is derived and displayed. You can delete it later.

11-19 is a flow chart showing an example of the variable display start setting process executed in step S171 of FIG. When the variable display start setting process is started, the effect control CPU 120 first, for example, based on the display result designation command (command stored in the display result designation command storage area) transmitted from the main board 11, etc. It is determined whether or not the result of the diagram display is "loss" (step S551). When it is determined that the special figure display result is "losing" (step S551; Yes), the effect control CPU 120, for example, receives the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main substrate 11 (stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area The variation pattern specified by the command) is a non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1, PA1-2, PC1-1) corresponding to the case of "non-reach" in which the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is not the reach mode. It is determined whether or not (step S552).

When it is determined that it is a non-reach variation pattern in the process of step S552 (step S552; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of final stop symbols constituting the non-reach combination (step S553 ). For example, the production control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the decoration pattern of the non-reach combination updated by the production random counter or the like provided in a predetermined area of the random number circuit 124 or the RAM 122, and stores it in the ROM 121. Determined decorative patterns (decorative patterns of non-ready-to-win combinations) are determined by referring to a pre-stored and prepared non-ready-to-win combination decorative pattern determination table.

When it is determined that it is not a non-reach variation pattern in the process of step S552 (step S552; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines the final stop symbol combination of the ready-to-win combination (step S554 ). For example, the production control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the decoration pattern of the reach combination, which is updated by the random number circuit 124 or the production random counter, etc., and prepares the reach combination stored in advance in the ROM 121. By referring to the decorative design determination table, etc., the determined decorative design (decorative design of the reach combination) is determined.

When it is determined that the special figure display result is not "losing" in the process of step S551 (step S551; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the special figure display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "definite". Or, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is a "small hit" (step S555). If it is determined that the special figure display result is "probability" or "small hit" (step S555; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 is, for example, an open chance eye, in the case of "probability" or "small hit". A combination of final decoration symbols corresponding to the case is determined (step S556). Effect control CPU120, for example, in response to the fact that either the variation pattern PC1-1 or PC1-2 is specified by the variation pattern specification command, out of the plurality of types of open chance eyes, the final A combination of fixed decoration patterns to be a stop pattern is determined. In this case, numerical data indicating a random number for determining the chance number to be updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting section is extracted, and a predetermined chance number determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like is extracted. By referring to it, it is sufficient to determine a combination of fixed decorative symbols that form one of the open chances. In the chance determination table, there are, for example, "3", "5", and "7" composed of odd numbers as chances for the big hit, and "2" and "7" composed of even numbers as the chance for the small win. 4", "6", etc. may be set.

In the processing of step S555, if the special figure display result is determined to be neither "probably" nor "small hit" (step S555; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines the final stop symbol that constitutes the big hit combination. A combination of symbols is determined (step S557). The effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a big hit fixed symbol that is updated by a random number circuit 124 or a random counter for effect. Subsequently, according to the jackpot type specified by the display result designation command transmitted from the main board 11, the image display device 5 is displayed by referring to a jackpot determination symbol determination table stored in advance and prepared in the ROM 121. The decoration symbols having the same symbol number, which are stop-displayed together in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R in the display area, are determined.

After executing any one of the processes of steps S553, S554, S556, and S557, the effect control CPU 120 performs a plurality of types of change effects with different periods from the start of the variable display until the display mode of the pending display changes. Of these, a change effect setting process for setting which type of change effect is to be executed is executed (step 074AKS021).

FIG. 11-20 is a flow chart showing an example of the change effect setting process executed in step 074AKS021 of FIG. 11-19. When the change effect setting process is started, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the display mode of any of the pending display or the active display changes in the variable display to be executed this time (step 074AKS022). In step 074AKS022, by referring to the display step change pattern determined in step 074AKS004 of FIG. is changed, or whether the display mode of the active display is changed.

When the display mode of the pending display or the active display changes in the variable display to be executed this time (step 074AKS022; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs setting for executing the change effect of the success mode (step 074AKS023). , ends the change effect setting process. On the other hand, when the display mode of the pending display or the active display does not change in the variable display to be executed this time (step 074AKS022; No), the setting for executing the change effect of the failure mode or the setting not to execute the change effect is performed. (Step 074AKS024), the change effect setting process is terminated. In step 074AKS024, whether or not to execute the change effect of the failure mode may be determined according to the variable display result or the variation pattern, for example.

The effect of changing the success mode of the characterizing part 074AK in this embodiment is the effect of changing the display mode when the shooting star image 074AK001 collides with the pending display or active display to be changed. The failure mode change effect is a effect in which the shooting star image 074AK002 collides with the pending display or active display to be changed, but the display mode is not changed. In both modes, the image of the shooting star is the same, and it is impossible to recognize whether or not the display mode of the object changes until after the collision. In addition, during the monochrome effect, the pending display and the active display of the change target are also displayed in monochrome. there is

In the processing of step 074AKS023 and step 074AKS024, when executing a change effect, the execution period (change effect period) of the change effect is also set. The change effect period may be any period as long as it is a period during which the variable display being executed is not performed during the ready-to-win effect of super reach. This is to prevent the player's attention from being dispersed due to the degree of expectation being dispersed between the ready-to-win effect being executed and the change effect.

Further, when there are a plurality of objects to be changed, any one of success mode, failure mode, and no change effect may be determined for each suspension (including active display). Further, when the display mode change pattern is determined, the pattern of the change effect may also be determined from among a plurality of patterns for one display mode change pattern.

Returning to the description of the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 11-19, after executing the process of step 074AKS021, the effect control CPU 120 determines one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance as the effect control pattern (step S560 ). Production control CPU 120, for example, corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern determination result designation command, selects one of the prepared production control patterns (special figure fluctuation production control pattern) and uses it. set as a pattern. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns (suspended display change pattern) corresponding to the execution setting of the pending display change effect by the pending display setting process of step S161, and selects the use pattern set as Also, when it is determined in step S559 that the specific effect is executed, one of the effect control patterns (specific effect control pattern) corresponding to the execution of the specific effect is selected and set as the usage pattern.

Following the process of step S560, the production control CPU 120, for example, corresponds to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern determination result specification command, the production provided in a predetermined area (production control timer setting unit, etc.) of the RAM 122 The initial value of the control process timer is set (step S561). Then, the setting for starting the variation of the decoration pattern on the display screen of the image display device 5 is performed (step S562). At this time, the effect control CPU 120, for example, the display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern (effect control pattern at the time of special figure fluctuation) determined in the process of step S559 , etc., to start the fluctuation of the decorative design in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided in the display area of the image display device 5. All you have to do is

After executing the process of step S562, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to "2", which is the value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S563), and then performs the variable display start setting process. exit.

FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect processing during variable display executed in step S172 shown in FIG. When the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 30 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern has elapsed based on the timer value of the effect control process timer. (Step S801). Production control CPU120, for example, to update the timer value of the production control process timer (for example, 1 subtraction), when the end code is read from the production control pattern corresponding to the production control process timer value after the update. Then, it is determined that the variable display time has passed.

When it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed in the process of step S801 (step S801; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the reach effect period for executing the reach effect (step S802). The ready-to-win effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern determined according to the variation pattern. When it is determined that it is the ready-to-win effect period (step S802; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs control for executing the ready-to-win effect (step S803).

After executing the process of step S803, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is time to end the monochrome effect (step 074AKS031). Since the end timing of the monochrome effect is determined to be one of the timings 1 to 3 at step 074AKS055 in FIG. It should be determined whether or not there is

When it is time to end the monochrome effect (step 074AKS031; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs monochrome effect end control to end the monochrome effect (step 074AKS032), and clears the monochrome effect flag to the OFF state (step 074AKS032). 074AKS033). In the process of step 074AKS032, since the monochrome output process is completed, the number of colors used for the target image to be displayed in the monochrome mode returns to the normal number of colors. Therefore, control is performed to display the pending display and the active display whose display mode has been changed by the change effect in the display color after the change, and to output the success sound.

After executing the processing of step 074AKS033, if it is determined that it is not the ready-to-win effect period in step S802 (step S802; No), or if it is determined that it is not the end timing of monochrome effect in step 074AKS031 (step 074AKS031; No), The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the change effect period for executing the change effect of the success mode or the failure mode (step 074AKS034). The change effect period is set in accordance with the setting to execute the change effect at step 074AKS023 or step 074AKS024 in FIG. 11-20. When it determines with it being a change production|presentation period (step 074AKS034; Yes), CPU120 for production|presentation control performs control for performing the change production|presentation of a success mode or a failure mode (step 074AKS035). In the process of step 074AKS035, during the specific effect state during execution of the monochrome effect (when the monochrome effect flag is ON), since the monochrome output process is being performed, even if the change effect of the success mode is executed, Regardless of the degree of expectation of a big hit, pending display and active display are displayed in "white". On the other hand, in the normal effect state in which the monochrome effect is not being executed, the display color is displayed according to the degree of expectation according to the display mode change pattern. In addition, in the processing of step 074AKS035, the execution start sound of the change effect of the success mode or the failure mode, that is, the effect start sound for informing the player that the shooting star image has been displayed, and the success effect or failure effect are performed. A success sound or a failure sound that makes it audibly recognizable is output. However, during execution of the monochrome effect (when the monochrome effect flag is ON), only the execution start sound is output, and the success sound or failure sound is not output. The success sound or the failure sound may be output at the timing when the monochrome effect is completed, for example, by the processing of step 074AKS032. According to this, the player can easily recognize that the display mode of the pending display or the active display to be changed is changed after the monochrome effect is finished.

After executing the process of step 074AKS035, or if it is not a change production period (step 074AKS034; No), the production control CPU 120, for example, based on the settings in the production control pattern determined corresponding to the variation pattern, other , control for executing effects during variable display including the variable display operation of decorative patterns (step 808).

When it is determined that the variable display time has passed in the process of step S801 (step S801; Yes), the effect control CPU 120, for example, transmits a predetermined display control command to the VDP of the display control unit 123. Then, control is performed to derive and display the final stop design (determined decoration design) which is the display result in the variable display of the decoration design (step S809). Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 sets a predetermined fixed time as a waiting time for receiving a command to start a big hit (step S811). Next, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to "3", which is the value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (step S812).

After executing any of the processes of steps S808 and S812, or when it is determined that the symbol confirmation command has not been received in the process of step S809 (step S809; No), the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect during variable display. End the process.

FIGS. 11-22 and 11-23 show examples of effect operations when a monochrome effect and a change effect are performed. As shown in FIG. 11-22(A), a variable display corresponding to the active display AH displayed in the active display area AHA is displayed in a state in which three pending displays H1 to H3 are stored. In this state, the speakers 8L and 8R output sounds such as sound effects and production sounds, and the game effect lamp 9 for game effects is also lit.

Then, when a new game ball wins the first start winning slot (reservation display H4 is displayed), the monochrome effect setting process is performed in the pre-reading notice setting process of FIG. 11-9, and the monochrome effect is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-22(B), in the image display device 5, the background image, the hold display, etc. are displayed in a monochrome mode, and the sound effects, production sounds, etc. are output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Control is performed to mute the sound and turn off the game effect lamp 9 for the game effect. FIG. 11-22(B) shows an example in which the variable display being executed in FIG. 11-22(A) is finished. Further, an example is shown in which the display mode of the pending display H4 changes according to the display mode change pattern of PT4-4-22 in FIGS. 11-12. In this example, it is assumed that timing C, which is the middle stage of super ready-to-win, is determined as the end timing of the monochrome effect at step 074AKS055 in FIG. 11-16.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 11-22(C), when each pending display shifts and the variable display corresponding to the pending display H1 is started, the pending display H1 is displayed as the active display AH. Since the suspension of the suspension display H4 changes according to the display mode change pattern of PT4-4-22, the display mode of the suspension display H4 changes in this variable display. Therefore, the effect of changing the success mode set in the process of step 074AKS023 in FIG. 11-20 is performed. As described above, since the monochrome effect is being executed, as shown in FIG. Although the effect start sound for informing the player of the fact is output, the success sound is not output. In addition, since the pending display is displayed in a monochrome mode during the monochrome presentation, the player cannot visually recognize which display color has changed (success mode or failure mode).

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-22(D), the ready-to-reach effect of super reach A is performed, and as shown in FIG. As indicated by -22(F), each hold display shifts and a variable display corresponding to hold display H2 is started. Here, since the hold of the hold display H4 changes according to the display mode change pattern of PT4-4-22, the display mode of the hold display H4 does not change in this variable display. Therefore, when the failure mode change effect is set in the processing of step 074AKS024 in FIG. 11-20, the failure mode change effect is performed as shown in FIG. 11-22(F). Even if the failure mode change performance is executed, the execution start sound, that is, the performance start sound for informing the player that the image of the shooting star is displayed is output, but the failure sound is not output. In addition, since the pending display is displayed in a monochrome mode during the monochrome presentation, the player cannot visually recognize which display color has changed (success mode or failure mode).

Subsequently, when the game ball newly wins the first start winning slot (reservation display H5 is displayed), although the monochrome effect setting process is performed in the pre-reading notice setting process of FIG. 11-9, the monochrome effect is performed. Since it is being executed, the execution setting for monochrome effect is not performed (see FIG. 11-16), but the processing of steps 074AKS003 and 074AKS004 in FIG. 11-9 is executed, so the display mode of the pending display changes. It will happen. FIG. 11-22(G) shows an example in which the variable display being executed in FIG. 11-22(F) is finished. Also, an example is shown in which the display mode of the pending display H5 changes according to the display mode change pattern of PT3-2-04 in FIGS. 11-13.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-22(H), each hold display shifts, and a variable display corresponding to hold display H3 is started. Here, since the hold of the hold display H4 changes according to the display mode change pattern of PT4-4-22, the display form of the hold display H4 does not change in this variable display, while the hold of the hold display H5 changes according to PT3. Since it changes according to the display mode change pattern of -2-04, the display mode of the pending display H5 changes in this variable display. Therefore, the change effect of the failure mode is performed for the suspension display H4, and the change effect of the success mode is performed for the suspension display H5. As described above, since the monochrome effect is being executed, the player cannot recognize whether each change effect is a success mode or a failure mode.

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-23(I), the ready-to-win effect of super reach A is performed, and as shown in FIG. As indicated by -23(K), each hold display shifts, and a variable display corresponding to hold display H4 is started. Here, the suspension (active display AH) of the suspension display H4 changes according to the display mode change pattern of PT4-4-22, so the display mode of the active display AH changes in this variable display. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 11-23(L), a success mode change effect is performed. In addition, FIG. 11-23(L) shows an example in which in the process of step 074AKS023 of FIG. 11-20, the change effect period is set during the reach effect of super reach. On the other hand, the hold of the hold display H5 changes according to the display mode change pattern of PT3-2-04 in FIGS. 11-13, so the display mode of the hold display H5 does not change in this variable display. In the illustrated example, regarding the hold of the hold display H5, an example is shown in which the change effect is set not to be executed in the processing of step 074AKS024 of FIG. 11-20.

When it comes to the middle of the super reach, it is determined at step 074AKS031 in FIG. 11-21 that it is the end timing of monochrome effect, and as shown in FIG. The game effect lamp 9 is lit, and a success sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In this example, if the display mode changes even once during the monochrome effect, a success sound is output. In this case, the success sound may be output once after the failure sound is output twice, so that the player can recognize by hearing how many times the display mode has changed. . According to this, it is possible to inform the player of the timing when the display mode is changed, so that the interest in the game can be improved. As shown in FIG. 11-23(M), when the monochrome rendering ends, the display color of the pending display H5 and the display color of the active display AH become visible. After that, the variable display ends. In the example shown in FIG. 11-23(M), the display mode of the active display AH changes according to the display mode change pattern of PT4-4-22 in FIG. , and the variable display result after that is "big hit". Since the pending display H5 changes according to the display mode change pattern of PT3-2-04 in FIG. 11-13, the display mode is "green" in the example shown in FIG. 11-23(M). In addition to the color, the shape may be changed as the change of the display mode. Further, for example, the color of the effect image displayed around the active display and the suspended display may be changed. Furthermore, in addition to changing the shape of the active display and the hold display, the color of the effect image may also be changed. Such a change may be performed during the monochrome effect, or the monochrome effect may be started by performing these changes.

As described above, according to the pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic part 074AK in this embodiment, the following effects can be obtained.

The effect control CPU 120 can execute a monochrome effect, and during execution of the monochrome effect (specific effect state), the number of colors of images including pending display and active display is displayed less than in the normal effect state. In the specific production state, the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher than in the normal production state, and in the normal production state, by executing the change production, the display color of the pending display and the active display is changed to a color according to the degree of expectation and displayed. Then, in the specific effect state, monochrome output processing is performed to display the display mode of the suspended display and the active display in a common color regardless of the degree of expectation. Then, when the specific effect state shifts to the normal effect state, the monochrome output process is completed, and the display modes of the pending display and the active display are displayed in a color corresponding to the degree of expectation. Therefore, the degree of expectation can be appropriately notified by color, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 displays the display mode of the pending display and the active display in the first stage "white" during the specific effect state, regardless of the degree of expectation. Therefore, the degree of expectation can be appropriately notified by color, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the processing of step 074AKS056, the effect control CPU 120, for example, when the monochrome object image is displayed in two colors, black and white, by monochrome effect, the lighting color of the game effect lamp 9 is also two colors, black and white. The number of colors is set to correspond to the number of colors of a monochrome image, such as . According to this, it is possible to emphasize the specific effect state and improve the game interest.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 starts executing a monochrome effect (monochrome output process) in the process of step 074AKS056. As a result, monochrome target images, such as pending display, active display, and background image, are displayed in monochrome mode. According to this, it is possible to make the specific effect state stand out and improve the game interest.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 silences the output sound during the specific effect state, outputs only the execution start sound and does not output the success sound or the failure sound for the change effect. According to this, it is possible to make the specific effect state stand out and to recognize the start of execution of the change effect. Then, the success sound or the failure sound is output at the timing when the monochrome effect ends. According to this, it is possible to make it easier to recognize that the specific display such as the hold display or the active display has changed, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

(Modified example of characteristic portion 074AK)
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and in order to solve at least one problem in the prior art, the one described in the above embodiment It may have a configuration of parts. Moreover, at least a part of each of the following modified examples may be combined.

In the above-described embodiment, in the specific effect state during the execution of the monochrome effect, the display corresponding to variable display and the background image are in the monochrome mode, but this is just an example. For example, in addition to the display corresponding to the variable display, an image that informs the degree of expectation for the big hit by the color to be displayed, such as the degree of expectation by the color of the displayed character or message, may be in a monochrome mode. According to this, as the production effect of the specific production state, it is possible to make the degree of expectation unrecognizable more suitably, and it is possible to arouse the player's sense of expectation. On the other hand, on the contrary, it is not an image displayed by lottery on the side of the effect control board 12 (not an image displayed by lottery according to the degree of expectation), but by a command or the like sent from the main board 11 side. An image (special information) for displaying information shall be displayed in a normal mode (for example, full color), not in a monochrome mode. Specifically, it consists only of numbers, for example, odd numbers are displayed in red and even numbers are displayed in blue (displayed in the same color as the decoration pattern), always small patterns that are always visible to the player, special symbols By displaying the number of reservations of 1 and special figure 2 with numbers, the number of reservations that can be specified by the player, and the display of the number of reservations, and the right-handed display, etc., should be controlled so as not to be in the monochrome mode in the monochrome production. Just do it. In addition, since the right-handed display is displayed in the variable probability state, it may be possible to execute the monochrome effect even in the variable probability state. Furthermore, in the normal effect state, the small symbols, the always reserved number display, the right-handed display, etc. may be displayed in a monochrome mode, and in the specific effect state, they may be displayed in another color such as red. According to this, it is possible to recognize the contents suggested by the special information even in the specific effect state, thereby preventing the deterioration of the interest in the game.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, in the specific effect state, the display corresponding to the variable display (specific display) such as the pending display and the active display is displayed in the first stage "white", but the normal effect state It may be displayed in a display mode that is not displayed in , and is displayed only in a specific effect state (for example, it is displayed in gray regardless of the degree of expectation).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the example in which the display mode of the suspended display or the active display always changes when the monochrome effect is executed is shown, but this is just an example. For example, without executing the process of step 074AKS052 in FIGS. 11-16, a monochrome effect may be executed regardless of whether the display mode of the pending display or the active display changes.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the timing for starting execution of the monochrome effect is the start winning timing (that is, the timing at which the game medium has won a prize), but this is just an example. The execution timing of the monochrome effect may be a predetermined timing during the variable display. The execution timing may be such that the player cannot specify to what stage the color of the frame has changed until the end of the monochrome effect. That is, as long as the monochrome effect can be executed during the execution of the effect of informing the degree of expectation of the big hit by the color to be displayed, the execution timing of the monochrome effect may be any timing.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 75AK)
Next, the characterizing portion 075AK of this embodiment will be described. In the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic part 075AK of this embodiment, unlike the characteristic part 074AK, the monochrome effect ends by changing the display mode (display color) of the specific display such as the pending display and the active display. That is, the change timing is the end timing of the monochrome effect. Hereinafter, the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic portion 075AK having such characteristics will be described. Note that descriptions of portions similar to those described in the basic description above and portions similar to those described in the characteristic portion 074AK will be omitted.

FIG. 11-25 is a flow chart showing an example of pre-reading notice setting processing executed by the characterizing portion 075AK. It should be noted that the same numbers as those of the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 11-9 are given to the parts that perform the same processing as the pre-reading notice setting process executed in the characteristic portion 074AK. In the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 11-25, in step 074AKS003, after determining the display mode of the active display as the final display mode of the pending display to be displayed, the setting process such as monochrome effect is executed ( step 075AKS001). The monochrome effect setting process of step 075AKS001 is a process of determining whether or not the monochrome effect is to be executed, the end timing thereof, and the display mode change pattern of the pending display and the active display.

FIG. 11-25 is a flow chart showing an example of the monochrome effect setting process executed in step 075AKS001 of FIG. 11-24. It should be noted that in the illustrated example, the same numbers as in FIG. 11-16 are assigned to portions that perform the same processing as the monochrome effect setting processing in FIG. 11-16. When the monochrome effect setting process shown in FIG. 11-25 is started, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the monochrome effect flag is set to the ON state, as in the monochrome effect setting process of FIG. 11-16. (Step 074AKS051), if it is off (Step 074AKS051; No), whether or not there is a hold (including active display) whose display mode changes before the current hold that is the target of the pre-reading notice That is, it is determined whether or not the display mode of the pending or active display present in the foreground (the display mode for the foreground) changes (step 074AKS051A). If the monochrome effect flag is ON (step 074AKS051; Yes) or if the front display mode changes (step 074AKS051A; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 terminates the monochrome effect setting process.

When the front display mode does not change (step 074AKS051A; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the display mode of the active display is other than "white" (step 075AKS012). Whether or not the display mode of the active display is other than "white" may be determined by confirming the display mode of the active display determined in step 074AKS003 of FIG. 11-24. If the display mode of the active display is "white" (step 075AKS012; No), that is, if the display mode of the active display does not change from the pending display, the effect control CPU 120, according to the number of pending, PT4-4-01 , PT3-1-01, or PT2-2-01 (not shown), and the monochrome effect setting process is terminated.

If the display mode of the active display is ``blue'', ``green'', or ``red'' other than ``white'' (step 075AKS012; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 indicates whether or not the monochrome effect is executed as a variable display result. Accordingly, it is determined according to the determination ratio shown in FIGS. 11-17 (step 074AKS053). After executing the process of step 074AKS053, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is decided to execute the monochrome effect, that is, whether or not the monochrome effect is to be executed (step 074AKS054).

If the monochrome effect is not executed, that is, if the monochrome effect is not executed (step 074AKS054; No), the effect control CPU 120, according to the determination ratio of the display mode change pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 11-11 to 11-15, The display mode change pattern is determined according to the display mode of the active display determined in step 074 AKS003 and the number of reserved memories indicated by either the first special figure reserved memory number designation command or the second special figure reserved memory number designation command ( Step 075 (AKS013), the process for setting monochrome effect etc. is terminated.

If the monochrome effect is to be executed, that is, if the monochrome effect is to be executed (step 074AKS054; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 follows the display mode change pattern determination table (for monochrome) shown in FIG. Determine the display mode change pattern according to the display mode of the active display determined in 074AKS003 and the number of reserved memories indicated by either the first special figure reserved memory number designation command or the second special figure reserved memory number designation command (step 075AKS014).

The display mode change pattern determination table (for monochrome) shown in FIG. 11-26(A) is a table that is referred to for determining the change pattern of the display mode of the suspended display and the active display when executing the monochrome effect. . In the characteristic part 075AK, when the monochrome effect is executed, the change pattern is determined such that only the display mode of the active display is changed without changing the display mode of the suspension display. Specifically, as shown in the figure, the display mode of the pending display is "white", and the display mode of the active display is "blue" to "red" so that the display mode change pattern is determined. Each display mode change pattern is set accordingly.

Returning to FIG. 11-25, after determining the display step change pattern in step 075AKS014, the effect control CPU 120 determines the timing of changing the active display according to the active display change timing determination table shown in FIG. 11-26(B). is determined to be one of the timings A to C according to the display mode of the active display (step 075AKS015).

The "timing A" of the characteristic portion 075AK in this embodiment is the timing before the reach state, that is, the timing immediately before entering the reach state, the "timing B" is the timing at the start of the reach effect of super reach, ” is the timing in the middle of the reach production of super reach. That is, "timing A" timing is the earliest timing after the start of the variable display, "timing B" is the next earliest timing, and "timing C" is the latest timing. As shown in FIG. 11-26, in the characteristic portion 075AK of this embodiment, the display mode of the active display changes to a mode with high expectations in the order of "timing C" > "timing B" > "timing A". The determination ratio is set such that the later the timing from the start of the variable display until the change occurs, the higher the rate at which the display mode of the active display changes to the display color expected by the player. It is

Returning to FIG. 11-25, after executing the process of step 075AKS015, the effect control CPU 120 determines the timing immediately after the change timing determined in the process of step 075AKS015 as the end timing of the monochrome effect (step 075AKS016). As a result, the monochrome output process ends at the timing when the display mode of the active display changes, and the active display is displayed in the changed display mode. After executing the process of step 075AKS016, the effect control CPU 120 performs monochrome effect execution control for executing the monochrome effect (step 074AKS056), sets the monochrome effect flag to the ON state (step 074AKS057), and performs the monochrome effect, etc. End the setting process. By performing the processing of step 074AKS056, the execution of the monochrome effect (monochrome output processing) is started, and thereby, the image of the monochrome mode object such as the suspended display, the active display, the background image, etc. The points to be displayed are the same as those of the characteristic portion 074AK. Also, in the specific effect state during monochrome effect execution, the pending display and active display are displayed in the first stage “white” (displayed in a display color that is displayed at a high rate before the change effect is executed). , control to mute output sounds such as sound effects and performance sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like in accordance with the execution of the monochrome performance, and to turn off the game effect lamp 9 for the game effect. is performed in the same manner as the characteristic portion 074AK.

Returning to FIG. 11-24, after executing the processing of step 074AKS001, the effect control CPU 120 is, according to the display mode change pattern determined in step 075AKS013 or step 075AKS014 of FIG. 11-25, the first pending display or the second pending display is displayed (step 075AKS002). After executing the process of step 075AKS002, the same process as the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 11-9 is performed (the same process as the feature part 074AK is performed).

FIG. 11-27 is a flow chart showing an example of the change effect setting process performed in the variable display start setting process in the characteristic portion 075AK (see FIG. 11-19). Note that the change effect setting processing performed in the characteristic portion 075AK differs in that the processing of steps 075AKS021 to step 075AKS023 is executed in addition to the change effect setting processing performed in the characteristic portion 074AK, but the other points are the same. do.

When the change effect setting process shown in FIG. 11-27 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the monochrome effect flag is set to the ON state (step 075AKS021). When the monochrome effect flag is off (step 075AKS021; No), the effect control CPU 120 executes the processing of steps 074AKS022 to step 074AKS024 in the same manner as the characteristic part 074AK.

On the other hand, when the monochrome effect flag is set to the ON state (step 075AKS021; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the display mode of the active display changes in the variable display to be executed this time (step 074AKS022). ). When the display mode of the active display does not change in the variable display executed this time (step 074AKS022; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the change effect setting process as it is.

When the display mode of the active display changes in the variable display to be executed this time (step 074AKS022; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the change effect pattern, which is the execution pattern of the change effect, to the change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 11-28. According to (step 075AKS023), after setting according to the change timing determined in step 075AKS015 of FIG. 11-25, the change effect setting process is terminated.

FIG. 11-28 is a diagram showing an example of a change pattern determination table. As shown in the figure, when the change timing determined in step 075AKS015 of FIG. At the start of the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win, which is the timing, the changing performance of the failure mode is performed, and at the middle of the super-reach, which is the timing, the changing performance of the success mode is performed. If the change timing determined in step 075AKS015 of FIG. At the start of a ready-to-win performance of a certain super ready-to-win, a variation performance pattern of pattern 2 is set to execute a success mode variation performance. If the change timing determined in step 075AKS015 in FIG. 11-25 is timing C, that is, immediately before the ready-to-reach state, the change effect pattern of pattern 3 in which the change effect of the success mode is executed immediately before the ready-to-reach state, which is timing A. is set.

In the illustrated example, an example is shown in which the change effect of the failure mode is executed at the timing when the display mode of the active display does not change, but there may be a pattern in which the change effect is not executed.

FIG. 11-29 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation when a monochrome effect and a change effect are executed. As shown in FIG. 11-29(A), a state in which a hold is stored as one of the hold displays H1 and a variable display corresponding to the active display AH displayed in the active display area AHA is being performed. In , output sounds such as sound effects and production sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 for game effects is also lit.

Then, when a new game ball wins the first start winning slot, the pending display H2 is displayed, and the display mode of the active display is determined in the pre-reading advance notice setting process of FIG. 11-24, and the monochrome effect setting process When the monochrome effect is executed at , as shown in FIG. 11-29 (B), the background image, the hold display, etc. are displayed in a monochrome mode on the image display device 5, and the effects from the speakers 8L and 8R Control is performed to mute output sounds such as sounds and effect sounds and to turn off the game effect lamp 9 for game effects. FIG. 11-29(B) shows an example in which the variable display being executed in FIG. 11-29(A) is finished. Further, in the illustrated example, the display mode of the active display in the pending display H2 is determined to be "red" (step 074AKS003 in FIG. 11-24), and is determined to be the display mode change pattern of PT2-4-02 (FIG. 11-25 step 075AKS014), and the active display change timing is determined to be timing C (step 075AKS015 in FIG. 11-25). That is, according to the changing effect pattern of pattern 1, the changing effects of the failure mode and the success mode are executed (see FIGS. 11-27 and 11-28).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 11-29(C), when each pending display shifts and the variable display corresponding to the pending display H1 is started, the pending display H1 is displayed as the active display AH. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-29(D), when the variable display corresponding to the pending display H1 is completed and the variable display corresponding to the pending display H2 is started, as shown in FIG. 11-29(E) , the pending display H2 is displayed as the active display AH. The example shown in FIG. 11-29(E) shows an example of the timing (timing A) immediately before the variable display corresponding to the hold display H2 enters the ready state. Since the change effect of failure mode and success mode is executed according to the change effect pattern of pattern 1, in the illustrated example, when the change effect of failure mode is performed at the timing (timing A) immediately before the ready-to-win state. It shows about It should be noted that in the changing effect, although the execution start sound, that is, the effect start sound that notifies the player that the image of the shooting star has been displayed is output, the success sound and the failure sound are not output. is similar to

Then, after reaching the ready-to-win state, when the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win is started (at the timing of timing B), as shown in FIG. When it comes to the timing C in the middle of the super reach, as shown in FIG. 11-29 (G), a success mode change effect is performed, and this is the end timing of the monochrome effect, as shown in FIG. 11-29 (H). , the monochrome effect is completed, and accordingly, the game effect lamp 9 for the game effect is turned on, and a success sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. As shown in FIG. 11-29(H), by changing the display mode of the active display, the monochrome rendering ends, and the display color of the active display AH becomes visible. In the example shown in FIG. 11-29(H), the display mode of the active display AH changes according to the display mode change pattern of PT2-4-02 in FIG. , and the variable display result after that is "big hit".

As explained above, according to the pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic part 075AK in this embodiment, the following effects can be obtained.

The effect control CPU 120 can execute a monochrome effect, and during execution of the monochrome effect (specific effect state), the number of colors of images including pending display and active display is displayed less than in the normal effect state. In the specific production state, the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher than in the normal production state, and in the normal production state, by executing the change production, the display color of the pending display and the active display is changed to a color according to the degree of expectation and displayed. In the specific effect state, the specific effect state is shifted to the normal effect state at the timing immediately after the display mode of the active display is changed. Therefore, the performance patterns are diversified and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a success mode change effect that changes the display mode of the active display and a failure mode change effect that does not change the display mode of the active display. Then, the monochrome effect is terminated at the timing immediately after the change effect of the success mode is executed and the display mode of the active display is changed. Therefore, it is possible to easily recognize that the display mode of the active display has changed, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Also, the effect control CPU 120 starts the monochrome effect by executing the setting process such as the monochrome effect in the pre-reading notice setting process executed at the timing when the pending display is displayed, that is, at the timing when the game medium wins. Then, after the variable display corresponding to the pending display of the target is started and displayed as the active display, the monochrome presentation is terminated at the timing immediately after the success mode change presentation is executed for the active display. Therefore, it is possible to easily recognize that the display color of the active display has changed, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 changes the display mode of the active display at one of the timings A to C. FIG. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-26(B), the later the change timing is, the more the display mode changes to the active display with a higher degree of expectation. According to this, the effect pattern becomes various and the game interest can be improved.

(Modified example of characteristic part 075AK)
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and in order to solve at least one problem in the prior art, the one described in the above embodiment It may have a configuration of parts. Moreover, at least a part of each of the following modified examples may be combined. Furthermore, all or part of the features shown in the modification of the feature portion 074AK may be combined.

In the above embodiment, the timing at which the display mode of the active display changes in the specific effect state in which the monochrome effect is being executed is determined by the process of step 075AKS015 in FIG. In addition to this, for example, even in the normal effect state, the timing at which the display mode of the pending display and the active display changes is the timing A in FIG. 11-26(B). to timing C may be determined. In this case, the timing at which the display mode of the active display changes may be determined to be the timing C more frequently in the specific effect state than in the normal effect state. According to this, it is possible to improve the sense of expectation for the specific effect state during execution of the monochrome effect.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example in which the timing of ending the monochrome effect is immediately after the display mode of the active display changes has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be the same timing as the timing of the change. In addition, the timing immediately after the change in the display mode of the pending display, or the timing at which the display mode changes, may be set as the end timing of the monochrome effect, not limited to the display mode of the active display. That is, the end timing of the specific effect state may include at least the timing when the change effect is executed and the display mode (display color) of the pending display or the active display changes. It may be the timing immediately after, or the end timing of the changed variable display. In this case, when the number of reserved memories is "3" or more, the monochrome effect can be executed, and the timing after the display mode changes after the reserved display shifts twice is determined as the end timing of the monochrome effect. Just do it. Specifically, in the setting process for monochrome effects, etc. in FIG. Counts the number of times pending has shifted since execution began. Then, when the count value is "2" or more, it is determined that the end condition of the monochrome effect is satisfied, and the timing at which the display mode of the pending display changes thereafter may be determined as the end timing of the monochrome effect. According to this, although the condition for ending the monochrome effect is that the display mode changes, it is possible to secure a viewing period for the monochrome effect, and to improve the effect of the effect.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the example in which the display mode of the active display always changes when the monochrome effect is executed has been shown, but this is just an example. Even when the monochrome effect is executed, the display mode of the active display may not change (that is, when the display mode of the active display does not change, it may be decided to execute the monochrome effect). ). In this case, the monochrome effect may end when the variable display corresponding to the hold that was the target when it was decided to execute the monochrome effect ends.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 153SG)
Next, the game machine in the characteristic portion 153SG of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-30 to 11-44.

FIG. 11-30 is part of a flow chart of the effect control process (S76) in the characterizing portion 153SG of this embodiment. In the effect control process processing in the characteristic portion 153SG of this embodiment, after the execution of the pre-reading notice setting processing (S161) shown in FIG. 42) after executing the pending display update process for updating the display mode and the number of display of the pending memory display displayed in accordance with the received command buffer 153SG194A at the time of start winning, any of the processing of S170 to S177 shown in FIG. is set to run. The start winning command buffer 153SG194A corresponds to the first start winning command buffer and the second start winning command buffer in the characteristic portion 074AK (see FIG. 11-7). Is the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storage of the first special figure reserved storage (area corresponding to the buffer number "1-1" to "1-4") and the variable display A storage area corresponding to the first special figure (an area corresponding to the buffer number "1-0" and corresponding to active display) is provided. In addition, in the start winning reception command buffer 153SG194A, the storage area (buffer number "2-1" to "2-4 ”) and a storage area corresponding to the second special figure during variable display (an area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0” and corresponding to active display) are provided.

FIG. 11-31 is a flow chart showing the pre-reading notice setting process (S161) executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the effect control process shown in FIG. 11-30. In the advance notice setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the contents of the receive command buffer 153SG194A at the time of start winning (153SGS241), and determines whether or not there is an entry in which the pending display flag is not set (153SGS242). If there is no entry for which the pending display flag is not set, the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated. It is determined whether or not there is an entry that has been set (153SGS243).

If there is an entry whose pending display flag value is already set to any one of 1 to 4, that is, if the pending display notice effect has already been executed, the entry (153SGS242 has the pending display flag "0" corresponding to the non-execution of the pending display notice effect is set to the pending display flag of the entry determined as not being executed (that is, it is decided to display the pending memory display corresponding to the entry with "○"). to end the advance notice setting process (153SGS251). As will be described later, the case where there is an entry whose value of the pending display flag is already set to any one of 1 to 4 means that the pending display notice effect has already been executed. That is, in the process of 153SGS243, when the suspension display forewarning effect has already been executed, execution of a new suspension display forewarning effect is restricted.

In 153SGS243, if there is no entry set to any of the values 1 to 4 of the pending display flag, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the entry (the entry determined that the pending display flag is not set in 153SGS242 ) indicates a big hit (153SGS244). When the pattern designation command of the entry indicates a big hit, the jackpot type is specified from the pattern designation command of the entry (153SGS245), and extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the production control counter setting unit 153SG193, for example. Based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pending display notice effect and the jackpot type specified in 153SGS245, by referring to a jackpot time pending display notice effect determination table (not shown), whether or not the hold display notice effect is executed and the hold display. A display pattern in the case of executing the advance notice effect is determined (153SGS246).

In 153SG246, for example, whether or not to execute the pending display announcement effect and the display pattern (announcement type) are determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 11-32(A). In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 11-32 (A), depending on the jackpot type specified in the processing of 153SGS245, the presence or absence of the pending display notice effect and the determination ratio of the display pattern (notice type) are changed.

In the characterizing portion 153SG of this embodiment, four types of display pattern α, display pattern β, display pattern γ, and display pattern δ are provided as the display pattern (preview type) of the pending display previous notice effect. Among these, when the display pattern of the pending display notice effect is determined to be the display pattern α, the pending memory display is displayed as a white square (◇) in the first pending memory display area 153SG005D or the second pending memory display area 153SG005U. When the display pattern of the pending display notice effect is determined to be the display pattern β, the pending memory display is displayed in the first pending memory display area 153SG005D or the second pending memory display area 153SG005U with a white star (☆). When the display pattern of the pending display notice effect is determined to be the display pattern γ, the pending memory display is displayed in the first pending memory display area 153SG005D or the second pending memory display area 153SG005U with the blue camera, and the pending display is performed. When the display pattern of the notice effect is determined to be the display pattern δ, the reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 153SG005D or the second reserved memory display area 153SG005U with the red camera. Further, when non-execution of the pending display notice effect is determined, the pending memory display is displayed in a white circle (○) in the first pending memory display area 153SG005D or the second pending memory display area 153SG005U.

Here, as shown in FIG. 11-32 (A), when the jackpot type is jackpot A (non-probable variable jackpot), non-execution of pending display notice effect is determined at a rate of 5%, and at a rate of 55%. determines the execution of the pending display forewarning effect in the display pattern α, determines the execution of the pending display forecast effect in the display pattern β at a rate of 20%, and determines the execution of the pending display forecast effect in the display pattern γ at a rate of 10%. is determined, and execution of the pending display forewarning effect in the display pattern δ is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, when the jackpot type is jackpot B or jackpot C (probability variable jackpot), non-execution of pending display notice effect is determined at a rate of 5%, and holding display notice effect with display pattern α is determined at a rate of 20%. Execution is determined, execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern β is determined at a rate of 55%, execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern γ is determined at a rate of 10%, and execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern γ is determined at a rate of 10% Execution of the pending display forewarning effect in the display pattern δ is determined.

Returning to 153SGS244, when the symbol designation command of the entry is a loss or a small hit, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the variation category from the variation category designation command of the entry (153SGS248), for example, the random number circuit 124 and effect control. Based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pending display notice effect extracted from the random counter of the counter setting unit 153SG193 and the big hit type specified in 153SGS249, a small hit/losing hold display notice effect determination table (not shown) is referred to. By doing so, it is determined whether or not to execute the pending display announcement effect and the display pattern.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-32(B), when the variable display result is lost and the variable category is non-reach, non-execution of the pending display notice effect is determined at a rate of 95%, Execution of the pending display forewarning effect in the display pattern α is determined at a rate of 5%, execution of the pending display forecast effect in the display pattern β is determined at a rate of 0%, and execution of the display pattern γ is determined at a rate of 0%. Execution of the pending display notice effect is determined, and execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern δ is determined at a rate of 0%. In addition, if the variable display result is a loss or a small hit and the variation category is other (normal reach is a loss or a small hit), the non-execution of the pending display notice effect is determined at a rate of 75%, and 20%. Execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern α is determined at a rate of 5%, execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern β is determined at a rate of 5%, and a pending display notice in the display pattern γ is determined at a rate of 0%. Execution of the effect is determined, and execution of the pending display forewarning effect with the display pattern δ is determined at a rate of 0%. In addition, when the variable display result is lost and the variable category is super reach, non-execution of the pending display notice effect is determined at a rate of 55%, and the pending display notice effect with the display pattern α is determined at a rate of 25%. Execution is determined, execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern β is determined at a rate of 10%, execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern γ is determined at a rate of 5%, and execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern γ is determined at a rate of 5%. Execution of the pending display forewarning effect in the display pattern δ is determined.

That is, as shown in FIGS. 11-32(A) and 11-32(B), in the characteristic part 153SG of this embodiment, when the pending display notice effect is executed, when the pending display notice effect is not executed In addition to being controlled to the jackpot game state at a higher rate than, when the pending display notice effect is executed in the display pattern β, than when the pending display notice effect is executed in the display pattern α The jackpot type is set to be jackpot B or jackpot C (probability variable jackpot) at a high rate. With such a setting, when the variable display result is "big hit" and the display pattern β is displayed as the display pattern (notice type), the jackpot type is higher than when the display pattern α is displayed. is the probability variable big hit, and the player's expectation for the probability variable big win can be increased.

Since the display pattern γ and the display pattern δ are display patterns that suggest the execution of the setting suggestion effect described later, the degree of expectation (big hit expectation) for being controlled to the big win gaming state than the display pattern α and the display pattern β. is not set to be high, and the degree of expectation (probability-variable degree of expectation for big win) for the type of big win to be big win B or big win C is the same.

In addition, in the characterizing part 153SG of this embodiment, the variation patterns that can be determined when the variable display result is a big hit are the variation patterns of normal reach and super reach, and as shown in FIG. The case where the display pattern δ is determined is the case where the variable display result is a big hit or the variable display result is a loss and the variation category is super reach. In other words, the display pattern γ and the display pattern δ (the blue and red camera modes) are suggested to be super reach variable displays capable of executing a setting suggestion effect, which will be described later. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-32 (B), if the variation category is non-reach or other (normal reach or small hit), that is, when it is determined that the special figure variation time is shorter than the super reach , the pending memory display is never displayed in the form of a blue or red camera.

Returning to FIG. 11-31, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the pending display notice effect is determined after executing the process of 153SGS246 or 153SGS249 (153SGS250). When execution of the pending display notice effect is determined, a value (one of 1 to 4) corresponding to the display pattern determined by the processing of 153SGS246 or 153SGS249 is set in the pending display flag of the entry to read ahead. The advance notice setting process is terminated (153SGS247). If it is decided not to execute the pending display notice effect, the pending display flag of the entry is set to "0" corresponding to the non-execution of the pending display notice effect, and the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated ( 153SGS251).

FIG. 11-33 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (S171) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variation start command reception flag is set (153SGS271). If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is set (153SGS271; Y), the buffer number "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure reservation storage in the start winning time reception command buffer (not shown) Various command data and various flags stored in association (that is, various command data and various flags corresponding to the first special symbol being displayed in a variable manner, the first to fourth first special symbol reserved storage corresponding command data and various flags) are shifted upward by one buffer number (153SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-1", Various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" of the 1 special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2", and the first special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer numbers "1-3" and stored.

If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is not set in 153SGS271 (153SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (153SGS273). If the second fluctuation start command reception flag is not set (153SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (153SGS273; Y), the illustrated Various command data and various flags (that is, variable display Various command data and various flags corresponding to the second special symbol, various command data and various flags corresponding to the first to fourth second special symbol reserved storage) are shifted upward by one buffer number. (153 SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1", Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the 2 special figure pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-2", and the second special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer number "2-3" and stored.

After executing 153SGS272 or 153SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (153SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop design) of the decorative design is determined according to the data stored in the display result designating command storage area (that is, the received display result designating command) (153SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop pattern of the decorative pattern according to the display result specified by the display result specifying command, and stores the data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. do.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 153SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the big hit A, the effect control CPU 120, for example, determines that three symbols are even-numbered symbols as the stop symbols. A combination of aligned decorative patterns (jackpot pattern) is determined. Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the big hit B, a plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than "7" (for example, "111", " 333", "555", "999", etc.). Further, when the received variable display result specifying command is the fourth variable display result specifying command corresponding to the jackpot C, a combination of decorative patterns (jackpot pattern) in which three patterns are aligned with "7" is determined as the stop pattern. do. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to the small hit, the stop pattern is a chance eye (3 ("334", "556", "778", etc.) are determined. Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to the loss, the decorative symbols in which the three symbols are not aligned as the stop symbols are combinations other than the above-described chance symbols. (losing pattern) is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decoration symbols corresponding to a numerical value matching the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach (153SGS277). If the variation pattern of the variable display is not the super reach variation pattern, proceed to 153 SGS285, and if the variation pattern of the variable display is the super reach variation pattern, the rear variable display suggestive effect during the reach effect of the variable display. and which effect is to be executed as the suggestive effect during variable rear display is executed (153SGS278). In other words, in the characteristic part 153SG of this embodiment, as shown in 153SGS277 to 153SG278, the suggestive effect during the rear variable display (big hit suggestive effect or setting suggestive effect) is the variation of the super reach variation pattern with a long special figure variation time. It can be executed only by display, and it is not executed by variable display of normal reach or non-reach fluctuation pattern with short special figure fluctuation time.

In addition, in the variable display of super reach in the characterizing part 153SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-41, the result of the variable display becomes a big hit as a suggestive effect during the front variable display from the start timing of the variable display. It is possible to execute a timer effect suggesting a character effect suggested by the character displayed on the image display device 5 or that the result of the variable display will be a big hit, and suggesting a period until the execution of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is started. , during the ready-to-win performance, which is the second half of the variable display, a jackpot suggesting performance suggesting that the result of the variable display will result in a big hit as a suggesting performance during the rear variable display, or a setting suggesting a set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. Suggestion production can be executed. In other words, the process of 153SGS278 is the process of determining whether or not to execute the suggestive effect during the rear variable display and which of the big win suggestive effect and the set suggestive effect to be executed during the ready-to-win effect as the suggestive effect during the rear variable display. .

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the suggestive effect during rear variable display (either the big hit suggestive effect or the set suggestive effect) has been determined in the process of 153SGS278 (153SGS279). If it is determined in the process of 153SGS278 that the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is not to be executed, the process proceeds to 153SGS285. A front part variable display suggestive effect determination process for determining which of the character effect and timer effect is to be executed as the suggestive effect during variable display is executed (153SGS280). In other words, in the characterizing part 153SG of this embodiment, the execution of the suggesting effect during the front variable display is not determined unless the execution of the effect during the rear variable display is determined. In the variable display of reach and normal reach, timer effects and character effects are not executed as suggestive effects during front variable display.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the character effect has been determined as the suggestive effect during front variable display (153SGS281). When it is decided to execute the character effect as the suggestive effect during the front variable display, the period until the start of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is set to the timer for waiting for the start of the suggestive effect during the variable rear display (as shown in FIG. 11-41 (A)). After 5 seconds from the start of the ready-to-win effect), proceed to 153SG285 (153SGS282), and if it is decided to execute the timer effect as the suggestive effect during the front variable display, wait for the start of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display. The period until the start of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display on the timer (as shown in FIG. 11-41 (B), the value corresponding to the effect pattern of the timer effect (specifically, the effect pattern of the timer effect is 25 seconds effect 5 seconds after the start of the ready-to-win effect when the pattern TS-1 is the period, and 10 seconds after the start of the ready-to-win effect when the pattern of the timer effect is the pattern TS-2 which is the effect period of 30 seconds) ) and proceed to 153SGS285 (153SGS283).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 selects the effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the variation pattern in 153SGS285. Then, the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table is started (153SGS286).

The process table contains display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). there is

Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display as a component for effect) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (153SGS287). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in this characteristic part 153SG, the effect control CPU 120 controls so that the decorative pattern is displayed variably according to the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designation command one-to-one. A variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns corresponding to the designated command.

Then, a variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (153SGS288). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (153SGS289). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 writes to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing variable display (fluctuation) of the decoration pattern. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (S172), and the variable display start setting process is terminated (153SGS290).

FIG. 11-34 is a flow chart showing the suggestive effect determination process during rear variable display (153SGS278) in the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 11-33. 10-34, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the start winning reception command buffer 153SG194A to specify the value of the pending display flag corresponding to the variable display (153SGS301). In this process, when the first variable display start command reception flag is set, the value of the pending display flag of the entry "1-0" of the start winning reception command buffer 153SG194A is specified, and the second variable display start command reception flag is set. If the display start command reception flag is set, the entry "2-0" in the start winning reception command buffer 153SG194A may be specified.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the suggestive effect during the rear variable display and the effect to be executed as the suggestive effect during the variable rear display based on the value of the reserved display flag specified in 153SG301 (153SG302).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-35(A), when the value of the pending display flag specified in 153SGS301 is "0", that is, the pending display notice effect is executed for the variable display. If not, 90% of the ratio determines non-execution of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display, 10% determines the execution of the jackpot suggestive effect as the suggestive effect during the rear variable display, and 0% of the ratio determines the execution of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display. Execution of setting suggesting effect is determined as suggesting effect during variable display. Also, if the value of the pending display flag specified in 153SGS301 is "1" or "2", that is, the pending memory display is displayed in a white square or star as a pending display notice effect for the variable display. If it is, the non-execution of the suggestion performance during the rear variable display is determined at a rate of 50%, the execution of the jackpot suggestion performance as the suggestion performance during the rear variable display is determined at a rate of 50%, and the performance of the suggestion performance during the rear variable display is determined at a rate of 0%. Execution of setting suggesting effect is determined as suggesting effect during rear variable display.

Furthermore, if the value of the reserved display flag specified in 153SGS301 is "3", that is, if the reserved memory display is displayed by the blue camera as the reserved display notice effect for the variable display, 30 % determines non-execution of the suggestive performance during the rear variable display, determines the execution of the jackpot suggestive performance as the suggestive performance during the variable rear display at the ratio of 35%, and determines the execution of the suggestive performance during the variable rear display at the ratio of 35%. Determines execution of the setting suggestion effect. Then, if the value of the reserved display flag specified in 153SGS301 is "4", that is, if the reserved memory display is displayed by the red camera as the reserved display notice effect for the variable display, 0 % determines non-execution of suggestive performance during variable rear display, 30% determines execution of jackpot suggestive performance as suggestive performance during variable rear display, and 70% as suggestive performance during variable rear display. Determines execution of the setting suggestion effect.

That is, in the characterizing part 153SG of this embodiment, when the pending display forewarning effect is executed for the variable display, it is more likely than when the pending display forecast effect is not executed for the variable display. It is set so that the execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is determined at a high rate. Furthermore, when the pending memory display is displayed by a blue or red camera as a pending display notice effect for the variable display (when the value of the pending display flag is "3" or "4"), Higher than when the pending memory display is displayed in a white square or star as a pending display notice effect for the variable display (when the value of the pending display flag is "1" or "2") It is set so that the execution of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is determined by a ratio, and the pending memory display is displayed as a white square or star as a pending display notice effect for the variable display. It is set so that execution of the setting suggestive effect is determined as the suggestive effect during the rear variable display at a higher rate than in the case.

Also, attention is paid to the case where the pending memory display is displayed with a blue or red camera as a pending display notice effect for the variable display (when the value of the pending display flag is "3" or "4"). Then, if the pending memory display is displayed on the red camera as the pending display notice effect for the variable display, the pending memory display is displayed on the blue camera as the pending display notice effect for the variable display. It is set so that the execution of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is determined at a higher rate than when it was displayed as a camera, and the pending memory display is a blue camera as a pending display notice effect for the variable display. It is set so that the execution of the set suggestive effect is determined as the suggestive effect during the rear variable display at a higher rate than when it is displayed in .

From the above, in the characteristic part 153SG of this embodiment, when the reserved memory display is displayed in a square or a star shape as the reserved display notice effect for the variable display, the rear variable display suggestive effect While it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the big hit suggestive effect is executed, the pending memory display is displayed by a blue or red camera as a pending display notice effect for the variable display. In this case, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the setting suggesting effect is executed as the suggesting effect during the rear variable display.

Furthermore, if the pending memory display is displayed on the red camera as a pending display notice effect for the variable display, the pending memory display is displayed on the blue camera as a pending display notice effect for the variable display. Since the ratio of execution of the setting suggesting effect as the suggesting effect during the rear variable display is higher than in the case where it is displayed as a rear variable display, it is more important to play the game whether or not the setting suggesting effect is executed as the suggesting effect during the rear variable display. It is designed to attract people's attention.

Returning to FIG. 11-34, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the suggestive effect during rear variable display has been determined in the process of 153SGS302 (153SGS303). If it is determined in the process of 153SGS302 that the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is not to be executed, the process of determining the suggestive effect during the variable rear display is terminated. , 153SGS302, it is determined whether or not execution of a jackpot suggestive effect is determined as a suggestive effect during rear variable display (153SGS304).

In the processing of 153SGS302, when the execution of the big hit suggestive effect as the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is determined, the effect pattern of the big hit suggestive effect is determined and stored based on the result of the variable display, and the suggestive effect determination process during the rear variable display is performed. End (153SGS305).

As shown in FIG. 11-35(B), three effect patterns, pattern AS-1 to pattern AS-3, are provided as effect patterns that can be determined in the process of 153SGS305. Of these production patterns, the pattern AS-1 is a production pattern (big hit expectation: low) that suggests that the ratio of the variable display result to a big win (big hit expectation) is the lowest, and the pattern AS-2 is: This is an effect pattern (expectation for big win: medium) that suggests that the ratio of the variable display result to the big win is higher than the pattern AS-1, and the putter AS-3 has the highest ratio of the variable display result to the big win. It is a production pattern that suggests high (big hit expectation: high).

Then, in the process of 153SGS305 described above, as shown in FIG. 11-36, when the variable display result is a big hit, the production control CPU 120 sets the production pattern of the big hit suggestion production at a rate of 10% to the pattern AS-1. , pattern AS-2 is determined at a rate of 30%, and pattern AS-3 is determined at a rate of 60%.

On the other hand, in the process of 153SGS302, when it is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the RAM 122 and refers to the setting value specified command received from the CPU 103 (Pachinko game machine 1 (153SGS306). Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines and stores the effect pattern of the setting suggestive effect based on the specified set value, and ends the suggestive effect determination processing during rear variable display (153SGS307).

As shown in FIG. 11-35(B), a total of five patterns from pattern SS-1 to pattern SS-5 are provided as determinable effect patterns in 153SG307. Among these patterns SS-1 to SS-5, pattern SS-1 suggests the possibility that the set value is an odd number (for example, 1, 3, 5), and pattern SS-2 suggests the possibility that the set value is an even number ( For example, 2, 4, 6), pattern SS-3 suggests the possibility that the setting value is an odd-numbered intermediate setting or higher (for example, 3 or 5), pattern SS-4 indicates that the setting value may be an even intermediate setting or higher (eg, 4 or 6), and pattern SS-5 suggests that the setting value may be the highest setting (eg, 6).

Patterns SS-1 and SS-2 are determined at a high rate when the set value is any one of 1 to 4 (low setting), so that the set value is either 5 or 6 (high setting). It is assumed that the degree of expectation of being either is low, and for pattern SS-3 and pattern SS-4, when the setting value is either 5 or 6, it is determined at a high rate, so that the setting value 5, It is said that expectations for being 6 are high.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 153SG, the setting values 1 to 4 are set to be low, and the setting values 5 and 6 are to be high. Alternatively, setting values 1 and 2 may be set low, setting values 3 and 4 may be medium settings, and setting values 5 and 6 may be high settings, and the performance pattern execution ratio may be set.

In the process of 153SGS307 described above, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the effect control CPU 120 changes the effect pattern to pattern SS- at a rate of 60%, as shown in FIG. 11-37. 1, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 25%, pattern SS-3 at a rate of 9%, pattern SS-4 at a rate of 6%, pattern SS-4 at a rate of 0% Decide on SS-5. Further, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the production pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 25%, determined to be pattern SS-2 at a rate of 60%, and 6 %, the pattern SS-3 is determined, the pattern SS-4 is determined at the rate of 9%, and the pattern SS-5 is determined at the rate of 0%. Further, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the production pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 50%, determined to be pattern SS-2 at a rate of 20%, and determined to be pattern SS-2 at a rate of 20%. SS-3 is determined at a rate of 10%, pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 10%, and pattern SS-5 is determined at a rate of 0%.

Further, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4, the pattern SS-1 is determined as the production pattern at a rate of 20%, the pattern SS-2 is determined at a rate of 50%, and the pattern SS-2 is determined at a rate of 50%. %, pattern SS-3 is determined, pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 20%, and pattern SS-5 is determined at a rate of 0%. Further, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 5, the production pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 20%, determined to be pattern SS-2 at a rate of 30%, and determined to be pattern SS-2 at a rate of 30%. %, pattern SS-3 is determined, pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 20%, and pattern SS-5 is determined at a rate of 0%. Further, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the pattern SS-1 is determined as the production pattern at a rate of 30%, the pattern SS-2 is determined at a rate of 20%, and 15 %, the pattern SS-3 is determined, the pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 30%, and the pattern SS-5 is determined at a rate of 5%.

As described above, in the present characteristic portion 153SG, the setting value suggestion effect is executed in pattern SS-1 or pattern SS-2, thereby suggesting that the setting value is any one of 1 to 4. It is suggested that the set value is 5 or 6 by executing the effect in pattern SS-3 or pattern SS-4. Then, when the setting suggesting effect is executed in the pattern SS-5, the set value of 6 is confirmed.

FIG. 11-38 is a flow chart showing a suggestive effect determination process during front variable display (153SGS280) executed by effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 11-33. 11-38, the effect control CPU 120 first specifies the variable display result of the variable display (153SGS311). Also, it is determined whether or not execution of the setting suggesting effect is determined as the suggesting effect during rear variable display (153SGS312).

If the execution of the jackpot suggestion performance is determined as the rear variable display suggestive performance, whether or not to execute the front variable display suggestion performance and the front variable display suggestion based on the execution of the jackpot suggestion performance and the result of the variable display. The effect to be executed as the effect is determined from the character effect and the timer effect (153SGS313). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-39(A), when the result of the variable display is a big hit, the non-execution of the suggestion effect during the front variable display is determined at a rate of 40%, and at a rate of 30%. determines execution of a character performance as a suggestive performance during front variable display, and determines execution of a timer performance as a suggestive performance during front variable display at a rate of 30%. Also, if the result of the variable display is a failure, 70% of the decisions are made to not execute the suggestive effect during the front variable display, and 25% of the decisions are made to execute the character effect as the suggestive effect during the variable front display. Then, at a rate of 5%, execution of a timer effect is determined as a suggestive effect during front variable display.

In other words, in the case where the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, when the variable display result is a big hit, the front variable display is performed at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a loss. Execution of suggestive performance is determined, and when the result of variable display is a big hit, execution of character performance and execution of timer performance are determined at the same rate as suggestive performance during front variable display, while variable display result. In the case of a failure, execution of the character performance is determined at a higher rate than execution of the timer performance as a suggestive performance during the front variable display. is set.

In addition, when execution of the set suggesting effect as the suggesting effect during the rear variable display is determined, the effect control CPU 120 executes the setting suggesting effect and the suggesting effect during the front variable display based on the result of the variable display. An effect to be executed as a suggestive effect during presence/absence and front variable display is determined from the character effect and the timer effect (153SGS314). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-39(B), when the result of the variable display is a big hit, the non-execution of the suggestion effect during the front variable display is determined at a rate of 30%, and at a rate of 0%. determines execution of a character performance as a suggestive performance during front variable display, and determines execution of a timer performance as a suggestive performance during front variable display at a rate of 70%. In addition, when the result of the variable display is a failure, 80% of the decisions are made to not execute the suggestive effect during the front variable display, and 0% of the decisions are made to execute the character effect as the suggestive effect during the variable front display. Then, execution of the timer effect is determined as the suggestive effect during the front variable display at a rate of 20%.

In other words, when the execution of the set suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, if the variable display result is a big hit, the front variable display is being performed at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a loss. It is set so that the execution of the suggestive effect is determined and the execution of the character effect as the suggestive effect during the front variable display is not determined regardless of whether the result of the variable display is a big win or a loss. That is, the degree of expectation for a big hit in the timer effect is set higher than the degree of expectation for a big win in the character effect.

For this reason, when the variable display result is a big hit, execution of the timer effect is determined at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a loss, so it is suggested during the front variable display. When the timer effect is executed as the effect, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the variable display result is a big hit.

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-38, after executing 153SGS313 or 153SGS314, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the suggestive effect during front variable display is determined (153SGS315). If it is decided not to execute the suggestive effect during the variable display of the front part, the process of deciding the suggestive effect during the variable display of the front part is terminated, and if it is decided to execute the suggestive effect during the variable display of the front part, the forward part is further processed. It is determined whether or not execution of a character presentation has been decided as a suggestive presentation during variable display (153SGS316).

When it is determined to execute a character presentation as a suggestive presentation during front variable display, the presentation pattern of the character presentation is determined and stored based on the result of the variable display, and the suggestive presentation determination processing during variable front display is completed. (153 SGS317).

Incidentally, as the effect pattern of the character effect that can be determined in the processing of 153SGS317, as shown in FIG. . Among these production patterns, the pattern CS-1 is a production pattern (big hit expectation: low) suggesting that the variable display result by displaying the character A (not shown) on the image display device 5 has the lowest probability of a big win. Pattern CS-2 is an effect pattern suggesting that the ratio of the variable display result to a big hit by displaying a character B (not shown) on the image display device 5 is higher than pattern CS-1 (expectation for big win: medium ).

For this reason, in the processing of 153SGS317, as shown in FIG. , and the pattern CS-2 is determined at a rate of 80%. On the other hand, if the variable display result is a failure, the pattern CS-1 is determined as the effect pattern of the character effect at a rate of 80%, and the pattern CS-2 is determined at a rate of 20%.

Further, when execution of the timer effect is determined as the suggestive effect during the front variable display, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect pattern of the timer effect based on the effect determined to be executed as the suggestive effect during the rear variable display. is determined and stored, and the suggestive effect determination process during variable display of the part is ended (153SGS318).

As the effect pattern of the timer effect that can be determined in the processing of 153SGS318, as shown in FIG. 11-39(C), a total of two effect patterns, pattern TS-1 and pattern TS-2, are provided. Of these effect patterns, pattern TS-1 suggests that the percentage of variable display results that result in a big hit in image display device 5 is higher than pattern CS-1 and pattern CS-2 of character effects (expectation for big win: high). ) together with the pattern TS-2 indicates the period until the start of execution of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display, together with the image of the character X, for 25 seconds. is higher than the pattern CS-1 and pattern CS-2 of the character production (big hit expectation: high), and the period until the execution of the rear variable display suggestive production is started with the image of the character Y for 25 seconds. (See FIGS. 11-40 (C), 11-42 (D) and 11-42 (E)).

Therefore, in the processing of 153SGS318, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. The pattern is determined to be pattern TS-1 80% of the time, and pattern TS-2 20% of the time. In addition, when the suggestive effect during rear variable display whose execution has been determined is the set suggestive effect, the effect control CPU 120 determines the pattern TS-1 at a rate of 80%, and the pattern TS-1 at a rate of 20%. Decide on 2.

That is, when the timer effect is executed as the suggestive effect during the front variable display, the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-2 rather than the pattern TS-1 (that is, the timer In the case where the performance period of the performance is long and the character B is displayed on the image display device 5 rather than the character A, the ratio of executing the set suggestive performance as the suggestive performance during the rear variable display is set higher. Therefore, in the characterizing portion 153SG of this embodiment, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect period of the timer effect and the character displayed on the image display device 5 . Further, when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-2, the player can expect the setting suggesting effect to be executed more than when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-1. It is possible to improve the game interest.

As described above, in the characteristic part 153SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. The expectation of a big hit is set higher than when the character production is executed as a suggestion, and the suggestion production is set as a suggestion production during the rear variable display at a higher rate than when the character production is executed as a suggestion production during the front variable display. A production is to be executed.

As shown in FIGS. 11-33 to 11-41, when it is determined to execute the front variable display suggesting effect during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 determines in the variable display effect process (S172). Process data corresponding to the effect pattern of the suggestive effect during front variable display may be set, and the effect device may be controlled according to the content of the process data corresponding to the process timer in the subsequent effect process during variable display (S172). Further, when it is determined to execute the suggestive effect during the rear variable display during the variable display, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the timer for waiting for the start of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display by 1 each time the effect processing during the variable display is executed. Then, based on the value of the waiting timer for starting the suggestive performance during the rear variable display becoming 0, the process data corresponding to the performance pattern of the determined suggestive performance during the variable rear display is set. Then, the effect device may be controlled according to the content of the process data according to the process timer in the effect process during variable display (S172).

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 11-41 (A) and 11-41 (B), the jackpot suggesting effect and the setting suggesting effect as the suggesting effect during the rear variable display in the present characteristic portion 153SG are during the execution period of the reach effect. It is executed over 7 seconds, which is a period longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the non-reach fluctuation pattern. Therefore, even if the player takes his/her eyes off the image display device 5 for a moment, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the big win suggesting effect and the setting suggesting effect.

Next, an effect mode during variable display in the characteristic portion 153SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-42 to 11-44. First, as shown in FIGS. 11-42 (A) and 11-42 (B), a new starting prize is generated during the variable display, and based on the starting prize, the reserved memory display is displayed as a pre-reading notice effect. When the display pattern γ or the display pattern δ is determined, a new reserved memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera in the first reserved memory display area 153SG005D or the second reserved memory display area 153SG005U. .

Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-42(C) to 11-42(E), as a new variable display, when the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display which is the aspect of the camera is started, the front portion A timer effect is started as a suggestive effect during variable display. At this time, when the effect pattern of the timer effect is pattern TS-1, as shown in FIG. Renewal display of a timer for 25 seconds, which is a period up to the suggestive effect during variable display, is started. Further, when the effect pattern of the timer effect is pattern TS-2, as shown in FIG. Renewal display of a timer for 30 seconds, which is a period until the suggesting effect during display, is started.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-43(F) to 11-43(H), when the variable display progresses with the timer update display until the suggestive effect during the rear variable display, the super ready-to-win effect is started. Then, when the timer reaches 0 seconds (timer performance ends) during execution of the super ready-to-win performance, a big win suggesting performance or a setting suggesting performance is started as a suggesting performance during the rear variable display.

Specifically, when execution of a jackpot suggestive effect is determined as the suggestive effect during rear variable display, if the determined effect pattern is pattern AS-1, as shown in FIG. 11-43 (I) In the image display device 5, a message such as "chance!" indicating that the expectation of a big hit is low is displayed, and if the determined effect pattern is pattern AS-2, it is shown in FIG. 11-43 (J). is displayed on the image display device 5 to the effect that the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher than that of the pattern AS-1, and if the determined effect pattern is the pattern AS-3, as shown in FIG. As indicated by -43(K), the image display device 5 displays a message indicating that the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher than that of the pattern AS-2, such as "Extremely Hot!".

On the other hand, when execution of the setting suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during rear variable display, as shown in FIGS. In the case of patterns SS-1 to SS-4, setting value suggestion images 131SG005H, 131SG005I, 131SG005J, and 131SG005K of different characters are displayed on the image display device 5, respectively, so that they are set in the pachinko machine 1. settings are suggested. Further, when the effect pattern of the setting value suggesting effect is the pattern SS-5, the setting value suggesting image 131SGS005L, which is a collection of all the characters displayed on the image display device 5 in the patterns SS-1 to SS-4, is displayed on the image display device. 5.

As described above, in the characteristic part 153SG of this embodiment, when the pending memory display is displayed as a pre-reading notice in the mode of a blue or red camera, when the pre-reading notice is not executed or the reserved memory display The setting suggestion effect is executed at a higher rate than when is displayed as a white square or star. For this reason, the player anticipates that the setting suggestion effect will be executed in advance at the stage when the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera, and uses the mobile terminal such as a smartphone possessed by the player to suggest setting. It is now possible to make preparations for filming the production. In other words, the pending memory display in the mode of the blue or red camera in the characterizing portion 153SG of this embodiment is also an effect prompting the player to prepare for photographing the setting suggestion effect.

As described above, in the characterizing part 153SG of this embodiment, it is possible to execute a character effect and a timer effect with a higher degree of expectation for a big hit than the character effect as a suggestive effect during the front variable display indicating the degree of expectation for a big win. As shown in -39 (D), when the timer effect is executed during the variable display, the suggested effect is set as the suggested effect during the rear variable display at a higher rate than when the character effect is executed during the variable display. executed. That is, when the timer effect is executed, the degree of expectation for the big win is higher than when the character effect is executed. The setting suggestion performance is executed in a state where the player is paying attention, and the player can be prevented from overlooking the setting suggestion performance.

In addition, as the suggestive effect during the front variable display during the variable display, in addition to the character effect, it is possible to execute a timer effect that suggests the period until the start of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display. The player can easily recognize the execution start timing of the setting suggesting effect by the execution.

In addition, in the characterizing part 153SG of this embodiment, as a timer effect, a numerical value is displayed for the period until the start of execution of the suggestive effect during rear variable display (see FIGS. 11-42 (D) and 11-42 (E)). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a timer effect, for example, by performing an increase/decrease display of a gauge, meter, etc., the rear variable display is suggested. The period until the start of execution of the effect may not be clearly notified (only an approximate period may be indicated).

Furthermore, in the characterizing part 153SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and image display on the image display device 5, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, light emission of the game effect lamp 9, and display means other than the image display device 5 Any one of the displays in , or a combination of a plurality of aspects may be executed.

Further, in the characterizing part 153SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. Based on this, there is a case where a big hit suggesting effect is executed in addition to the setting suggesting effect as the suggesting effect during the rear variable display. In other words, even when the timer performance is executed, the big hit suggestion performance may be executed instead of the setting suggestion performance, so that the unexpectedness can be produced and the game interest can be improved.

In addition, in the characterizing part 153SG of this embodiment, based on the fact that the timer displayed on the image display device 5 has become 0 as the timer effect, the setting suggesting effect and the big hit suggesting effect are performed as the suggesting effect during the rear variable display. Although only one of them can be executed as an example, the present invention is not limited to this. , both the setting suggesting performance and the big hit suggesting performance may be executed as the suggesting performance during the rear variable display.

Furthermore, in the characterizing part 153SG of this embodiment, when the timer effect is executed as the suggestive effect during the front variable display, the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is always executed. The present invention is not limited to this, and a case may be provided in which even if the timer effect is executed as the suggestive effect during the front variable display, the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is not executed.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 11-40(B) and 11-40(C), as the effect patterns of the timer effect, a pattern TS-1 whose effect period is 25 seconds and a pattern TS-1 whose effect period is 30 seconds TS-2 is provided, and when the timer performance is executed with the pattern TS-2, the setting suggestion performance is executed at a higher rate than when the timer performance is executed with the pattern TS-1. In other words, when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-2, it is suggested that the setting suggestion effect is executed over a longer period of time than when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-1. It is possible to further prevent the player from overlooking the setting suggestion performance.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-41, the suggestion effect during the rear variable display including the setting suggestion effect is executed during the ready-to-win effect period, which is the latter half of the super ready-to-win variable display. can be further prevented from being overlooked.

In addition, in the characterizing part 153SG of this embodiment, a mode in which the setting suggesting effect is executed during the ready-to-win effect period, which is the second half of the variable display of super reach, has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, a case may be provided in which the setting suggestion effect is executed in the first half of the super reach variable display.

11-31 and 11-35, in the characterizing part 153SG of this embodiment, the display mode of the pending memory display as a pre-reading notice is a white square or a star, or a blue or red camera. In the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display (the value of the pending display flag is 3 or 4), which is the mode of the camera in which the pending display notice effect that can be displayed in the mode or the like can be executed, and the display mode is a blue or red camera mode, It is possible to determine the execution of the setting suggestion effect at a higher rate than the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display (the value of the pending display flag is 1 or 2) whose display mode is a white square or star. Therefore, in the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display (the value of the pending display flag is 3 or 4), which is the mode of the blue or red camera, the player can decide whether the variable display result will be a big hit or not. Since the setting-suggestion performance is executed when the player is paying attention, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the setting-suggestion performance.

Further, in the characterizing portion 153SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-42 and 11-44, when the pending display notice effect is executed, it corresponds to the pending memory display which is the target of the pending display notice effect. The setting suggestion effect can be executed in the variable display (variable display immediately after the pending display notice effect is ended). Therefore, since the setting suggesting effect is executed when the player is paying attention to the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display which is the target of the pending display notice effect, the player is less likely to miss the setting suggesting effect. more can be prevented.

In addition, in the characterizing part 153SG of this embodiment, a form in which a pending display notice effect can be executed as a pre-reading notice was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. An effect other than the effect may be made executable, and it may be suggested that the setting suggestion effect is executed as the effect mode of the effect.

Furthermore, in the characterizing part 153SG of this embodiment, the setting suggestion effect can be executed in the variable display (variable display immediately after the end of the pending display notice effect) corresponding to the hold storage display that is the target of the hold display notice effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and during the execution period of the pending display notice effect The setting suggestion effect may be executed from the previous timing).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-32, the ratio of displaying the pending memory display in the form of a blue or red camera as the pre-reading notice effect is changed to the white square or star shape as the pre-reading notice effect. Since the display ratio is set lower than the display ratio, the reserved memory display is displayed in a blue or red camera mode, so that the reserved memory display is displayed in a white square or star shape. It is possible to attract the attention of the operator and further prevent the operator from overlooking the setting suggestion effect.

Further, in the characteristic portion 153SG of this embodiment, the ratio of displaying the pending memory display as the pre-reading notice effect in the form of a blue or red camera is set to the state where the reserved memory display is displayed as a white square or star shape as the pre-reading notice effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera as a pre-reading effect. The ratio may be set higher than the ratio of displaying the pending memory display as a white square or star as a pre-reading advance notice effect, or the pending memory display as a blue or red camera color as a pre-reading notice effect. The ratio of displaying in the mode and the ratio of displaying the reserved memory display as a white square or star as the pre-reading advance notice effect may be the same.

In addition, in the characterizing part 153SG of this embodiment, by displaying the pending memory display in the form of a blue or red camera as the pending display notice effect, the player is prepared to shoot the setting suggestion effect. Since the player can prepare a form terminal such as a smart phone before starting the setting suggesting effect, the success rate of photographing the setting suggesting effect by the player can be increased.

It should be noted that, in the characterizing part 153SG of this embodiment, by displaying the pending memory display in the mode of a blue or red camera as the pending display notice effect, the player is prepared to shoot the setting suggestion effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera as a pending display notice effect, the speaker 8L, 8R Alternatively, the player may be separately prompted to prepare for photographing the setting suggesting effect by outputting a sound or displaying a message image on the image display device 5 .

In addition, in the characterizing part 153SG of this embodiment, the display pattern γ for displaying the pending memory display in the form of a blue camera and the display pattern δ for displaying the pending memory display in the form of a red camera are used to perform the pending display forewarning effect. It is executable, and as shown in FIG. 11-35 (A), when the pending memory display is displayed in the blue camera mode (when the value of the pending display flag is 3) and when the pending memory display is red The ratio of execution of the setting suggestion effect is different between the case of display in the camera mode (the value of the pending display flag is 4). In particular, when the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a red camera, setting suggestion effects are executed at a higher rate than when the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue camera. When the display is displayed in the form of a red camera, the player is more focused on whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed than in the case where the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue camera. It is possible to improve the game interest.

In addition, in the characteristic part 153SG of this embodiment, when the pending memory display is displayed in a blue or red camera mode, the pending memory display is displayed until the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display starts. Although the form in which the form does not change has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and a case may be provided in which the display form of the pending memory display changes from the blue camera form to the red camera form. Further, a case is provided in which the pending memory display corresponding to the variable display being executed is continuously displayed as the active display, and the display mode of the active display changes from the blue camera mode to the red camera mode. may By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the setting suggestion effect will be executed until the variable display is finished, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the characterizing part 153SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-33, the suggestive effect during the rear variable display including the setting suggestive effect is only in the variable display of the super reach fluctuation pattern with the long special figure fluctuation time. It is executable, and it is not executed in the variable display of the normal reach or non-reach fluctuation pattern with a short special figure fluctuation time, so the execution of the setting suggestion effect during the short variable display period is suppressed, and the game is played. It is possible to prevent the user from overlooking the setting suggestion effect.

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-41, the execution period of the setting suggestion effect is set to 7 seconds, which is longer than the special figure variation time of the shortened non-reach variation pattern, so during variable display of super reach (reach effect is being executed), it is possible to further prevent the player from overlooking the setting suggestion effect.

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-32, when the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera, the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display is super reach capable of executing the setting suggestion effect. Since it is suggested that it is a variable display, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the setting suggestion performance is executed by displaying the pending memory display in the form of a blue or red camera, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game. can be improved.

Also, as shown in FIG. 10-32, if the variation category is non-reach or other (normal reach or small hit), that is, if it is determined that the special figure variation time is shorter than the super reach, pending display Since the pending memory display is not displayed in the blue or red camera mode as the advance notice effect, the player's attention is not focused on the pending memory display being displayed in the blue or red camera mode. In spite of this, it is possible to prevent the setting suggesting effect from being executed and the interest to be lowered due to the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory display being the variable display of non-reach, normal reach, or the like.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 11-33 to 11-41, during the variable display of super reach, it is possible to execute the suggestive effect during the front variable display including the timer effect, but it is more special than the variable display of super reach. Since the timer effect is not executed during the variable display of non-reach and normal reach with a short fluctuation time, the suggestive effect during the rear variable display including the setting suggestion effect is not executed Timer effect during the variable display of non-reach and normal reach It is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconsistency in the performance due to the execution of

(Modified example of characteristic portion 153SG)
Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention may be modified or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. include.

For example, in the characterizing part 153SG of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. The expectation of a big hit is set higher than when the character production is executed, and the suggestion production is set as the suggestion production during the rear variable display at a higher rate than when the character production is executed as the suggestion production during the front variable display. is set to be executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. is set lower than the ratio for determining the execution of the character effect as the suggestive effect during the front variable display, and when the timer effect is executed as the suggestive effect during the variable front display, the variable front part It may be set so that the set suggesting effect is executed as the suggesting effect during rear variable display at a higher rate than when the character effect is executed as the suggesting effect during display.

Further, in the characterizing part 153SG of the above-described embodiment, as a pre-reading notice, the reserved memory display is displayed as a white square, a star, or a blue 11-46 (A) and 11-46 (A) and As shown in FIG. 11-46(B), when the reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 153SG005D or the second reserved memory display area 153SG005U, the image display device 5 displays the first reserved memory display area 153SG005D. When the predetermined effect image 153SG005E overlaps the second reserved memory display area 153SG005U, at least the reserved memory display in the mode of the blue or red camera is displayed preferentially over the effect image 153SG005E (the blue or red camera The reserved memory display in the form of (1) may be displayed so as not to be hidden by the effect image 153SG005E). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the reserved memory display in the form of the blue or red camera due to the reserved memory display in the form of the blue or red camera being blocked by the effect image 153SG005E. be able to.

Further, in the characterizing part 153SG of the above-described embodiment, an example is given of a mode in which the setting suggestion effect can be executed for 7 seconds only during the variable display of super reach, but the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in FIGS. 11-47(A) and 11-47(B), as a modified example 153SG-3, it is possible to execute a setting suggesting effect for 7 seconds during variable display of normal reach and non-shortening non-reach. good too. Furthermore, during the variable display of the shortened non-reach, a period dedicated to the variable display of the shortened non-reach (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-47 (C), it is a special variable time of the variable display of the shortened non-reach 3.75 seconds to 3 seconds (shorter than 5.75 seconds)) may be executed setting suggestion effect.

Further, in the characteristic part 153SG of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 153SG-4, the pending memory display is a blue camera mode. The decision ratio of at least one effect pattern in the setting suggesting effect may be different between the case of displaying in the case of displaying in the form of the red camera and the case of displaying in the mode of the red camera. By doing so, the player can be made to pay attention to which of the mode of the blue camera or the mode of the red camera the suspension storage display is displayed as the suspension display advance notice performance, so that the game interest can be improved.

Further, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the above-described embodiment, two timings (25 seconds and 30 seconds after the start of variable display) are provided as the start timing of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display during the variable display of super reach. Although the setting suggestive effect is more likely to be executed as the rear variable display suggestive effect by executing the rear variable display suggestive effect from the timing, the present invention is not limited to this, and the modified example 153SG- As 5, when the setting suggestion effect start timing is 30 seconds after the start of the variable display, the setting suggestion effect is patterned at a higher rate than when the setting suggestion effect start timing is 25 seconds after the variable display start. SS-3 to pattern SS-5, etc., may be executed with effect patterns suggesting high set values. By doing so, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the timing at which the setting suggestion effect is executed, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the above-described embodiment, the setting suggesting effect is executed according to the effect executed as the suggesting effect during the front variable display and the display mode of the pending memory display displayed as the pending display forewarning effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect that is executed as the suggesting effect during the front variable display and the effect that is displayed as the pending display forewarning effect are shown. It may be suggested whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed by only one of the display mode of the reserved memory display. Further, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode is illustrated in which setting suggestive effects can be executed as the rear variable display suggestive effects during the variable display in which the timer effects as the suggestive effects during the front variable display are executed. , the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display result of the variable display that executes the timer effect is a big hit, a setting suggesting effect is performed during the big win game (advantageous state in this invention) based on the variable display. may be executed.

Further, in the characterizing part 153SG of the above-described embodiment, when the suspension display forewarning effect is already executed, the execution of the new suspension display forewarning effect is restricted, but the present invention is limited to this. However, if the pending display forewarning effect has already been executed, only the execution of the new pending display foretelling effect in a part of the display patterns may be restricted. For example, when the pending display notice effect is already executed in the display pattern γ or the display pattern δ (when the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera), a new pending display notice effect is executed. It restricts only what is executed in the display pattern α and the display pattern β (that the pending memory display is displayed as a white square or star). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming difficult to understand due to the simultaneous execution of a plurality of pending display forewarning effects with different suggested contents. Further, when the pending display forewarning effect is already executed by the display pattern γ or the display pattern δ, the execution of the new pending display forewarning effect by the display pattern α or the display pattern β is restricted. , the player can be made to pay more attention to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed. Also, if the pending display notice effect has already been executed in display pattern α or display pattern β (when the pending memory display is displayed as a white square or star), a new pending display notice effect By limiting only what is executed in the display pattern γ and the display pattern δ (that the pending memory display is displayed in a blue or red camera mode), it is possible to determine whether the variable display result will be a big hit or not. It is possible to make the player pay more attention.

In addition, in the characterizing part 153SG of the above-described embodiment, a form in which the holding display notice effect can be executed as the prefetch effect in the present invention is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the prefetch effect Alternatively, an effect other than the pending display notice effect may be executable if it is an effect that can be executed from the timing before the target variable display starts.

Further, in the characterizing part 153SG of the above-described embodiment, a form in which a character effect and a timer effect can be executed as a suggestive effect during the front variable display suggesting that the variable display result will be a big hit was exemplified. The present invention is not limited to this, and as the suggestive effect during the variable display of the front part, any effect other than the character effect or the timer effect may be executed as long as the effect suggests that the result of the variable display will be a big hit.

(Explanation related to association of characteristic parts)
The configuration related to the characteristic portion 074AK, the configuration related to the characteristic portion 075AK, and the configuration related to the characteristic portion 153SG may be appropriately combined with part or all of the configurations related to other characteristic portions. For example, in the characteristic part 074AK or the characteristic part 075AK, when the display mode changes to a display mode with a high degree of expectation for a big hit due to the change effect during the monochrome effect, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is set to be high like the characteristic part 153SG. good too. According to this, since the setting suggesting effect is executed while the player is paying attention to the subsequent development by executing the effect in which the ratio of being controlled to be in a relatively advantageous state is high, the setting suggestion effect by the player is executed. It is possible to prevent overlooking of the suggestive production.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1... Pachinko game machine 5... Image display device 11... Main board 12... Effect control board 100... Game control microcomputer 120... Effect control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a specific display means capable of displaying a specific display related to the variable display on the display means;
a change effect executing means capable of executing a change effect that changes the display color of the specific display;
The change effect includes a first pattern that changes the display color of the specific display and a second pattern that does not change the display color of the specific display,
The display color of the specific display varies depending on the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state,
There are a normal performance state and a specific performance state, which is a performance state that can be shifted from the normal performance state, in which the rate of control to the advantageous state is higher than that of the normal performance state,
The specific rendering state is a rendering state in which the number of colors of the specific display and the background image displayed on the display means is smaller than that of the normal rendering state,
When the change effect execution means executes the change effect in the normal effect state, the display color of the specific display is changed to a display color corresponding to the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state, When the changing performance is executed by the changing performance executing means in the specific performance state, the display color of the specific display is not changed and is made a common display color regardless of the degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state. ,
displaying the display color of the specific display in a display color corresponding to the degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state when the specific display state is shifted to the normal display state;
When the transition from the normal rendering state to the specific rendering state is determined for the variable display that has not yet started, and the variable rendering that can be executed before the variable display to be determined is executed, The transition from the normal production state to the specific production state is restricted,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images